Free Essay

Accounting for Ngo in Bangladesh

In:

Submitted By
Words 54111
Pages 217
Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
VLT® 6000 Series
Adjustable Frequency Drive

12/01
Revision K

23-6108-00

Safety Guidelines

! DANGER

1.

Rotating shafts and electrical equipment can be hazardous. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that all electrical work conform to National Electrical Code (NEC) and all local regulations. Installation, start-up and maintenance should be performed only by qualified personnel.
Factory recommended procedures, included in this manual, should be followed. Always disconnect electrical power before working on the unit. 2.

3.

4.

Warnings Against Unintended Start
1.

Although shaft couplings or belt drives are generally not furnished by the manufacturer, rotating shafts, couplings and belts must be protected with securely mounted metal guards that are of sufficient thickness to provide protection against flying particles such as keys, bolts and coupling parts. Even when the motor is stopped, it should be considered “alive” as long as its controller is energized. Automatic circuits may start the motor at any time. Keep hands away from the output shaft until the motor has completely stopped and power is disconnected from the controller. Motor control equipment and electronic controls are connected to hazardous line voltages. When servicing drives and electronic controls, there will be exposed components at or above line potential. Extreme care should be taken to protect against shock. Stand on an insulating pad and make it a habit to use only one hand when checking components. Always work with another person in case of an emergency.
Disconnect power whenever possible to check controls or to perform maintenance. Be sure equipment is properly grounded. Wear safety glasses whenever working on electric control or rotating equipment.

The drive must be disconnected from the AC line before any service work is done.
The “Stop/Off” key on the local control panel of the drive does not disconnect the equipment from the AC line and is not to be used as a safety switch.
Correct protective grounding of the equipment must be established. The user must be protected against supply voltage and the motor must be protected against overload in accordance with applicable national and local regulations.
Ground currents are higher than 3 mA.

2.

3.

4.

While the drive is connected to the AC line, the motor can be brought to a stop by means of external switch closures, serial bus commands or references. If personal safety considerations make it necessary to ensure that no unintended start occurs, these stops are not sufficient.
During programming of parameters, the motor may start. Be certain that no one is in the area of the motor or driven equipment when changing parameters.
A motor that has been stopped may start unexpectedly if faults occur in the electronics of the drive, or if an overload, a fault in the supply AC line or a fault in the motor connection or other fault clears. If the “Local/Hand” key is activated, the motor can only be brought to a stop by means of the “Stop/Off” key or an external safety interlock. Motor Overload Protection
NOTE
It is responsibility of user or person installing drive to provide proper grounding and branch circuit protection for incoming power and motor overload according to National Electrical
Code (NEC) and local codes.
The electronic thermal relay (ETR) in UL listed VLTs provides Class 20 motor overload protection in accordance with the NEC in single motor applications when parameter 117 is set for ETR TRIP and parameter
105 is set for rated motor current.

! DANGER
Touching electrical parts may be fatal – even after equipment has been disconnected from AC line. To be sure that capacitors have fully discharged, wait 14 minutes after power has been removed before touching any internal component.

Copyright © 2001, Danfoss Graham

2

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Table of Contents
General ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Clearances......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Plenum Mounting ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
Grounding Plate ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
Shielded Wires ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
UL, C-UL, and CE Conformity ............................................................................................................................................................................ 5
Cross Reference — Model Number to VLT Type ..................................................................................................................................................... 6
Input Fuses ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
Internal Drive Fuses ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Locations of Conduit Entry, Terminal Blocks and Switches ......................................................................................................................................... 8
Location of Input Power (Mains) and Output Power (Motor Terminal Blocks) ........................................................................................................... 11
Power Connections ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Input Power Connection ................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Motor Wiring Connection ................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Grounding ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 14
Electronic Thermal Protection ............................................................................................................................................................................ 14
Terminal Tightening Torque .............................................................................................................................................................................. 15
Terminal Tightening Torque (continued) ............................................................................................................................................................ 16
Terminal Tightening Torque (continued) ............................................................................................................................................................ 17
External DC Bus Connection ............................................................................................................................................................................ 18
Multiple Motors ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 18
High Voltage Form C Relay .............................................................................................................................................................................. 18
Control Connections .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 19
Electrical Installation, Control Terminals ............................................................................................................................................................. 19
Typical Control Connections ............................................................................................................................................................................. 20
Electrical Installation, Control Wiring .................................................................................................................................................................. 21
DIP Switches 1 through 4 ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Ground Leakage Current ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Galvanic Isolation ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
Extra Safety Protection ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Electrical Noise ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
Application Control Connection Examples .............................................................................................................................................................. 23
Control Panel ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 24
Keys for Parameter Changes ........................................................................................................................................................................... 24
Indicator Lamps ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 25
Local Control .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Display Modes ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25
Changing Data ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 27
Changing Numeric Values ................................................................................................................................................................................ 27
Changing Functional Values ............................................................................................................................................................................. 27
Changing Numeric Values in a List .................................................................................................................................................................... 27
Quick Menu ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
To Enter or Change Quick Menu Parameter Data ............................................................................................................................................. 28
Example of Changing Parameter Data .............................................................................................................................................................. 28
Extended Menu ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 29
Manual Initialization of Parameters ..................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Uploading Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
VLT 6000 Start-Up ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 30
Pre-installation Checks ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 30
Installation Checks ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 30
Setting Up Drive for Motor Start ......................................................................................................................................................................... 30
Operational Tests — HAND .............................................................................................................................................................................. 30
Operational Tests — AUTO .............................................................................................................................................................................. 30
Final Adjustments .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 30
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

3

Programming......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 31
Description of Parameters ................................................................................................................................................................................. 31
Setup Configuration and Parameters Copy ....................................................................................................................................................... 31
Operation and Display
Parameters 000 through 017 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 31
Setup of User-defined Readout ......................................................................................................................................................................... 32
Load and Motor
Parameters 100 through 117 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 36
Procedure for Automatic Motor Adaptation: ........................................................................................................................................................ 38
DC Braking ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Motor Thermal Protection .................................................................................................................................................................................. 41
References and Limits
Parameters 200 through 228 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 42
Reference Handling.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 43
Reference Type ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 46
Warning Functions ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 48
Inputs and Outputs
Parameters 300 through 328 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 50
Analog Inputs ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Analog/Digital Outputs ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 56
Relay Outputs ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 59
Application Functions
Parameters 400 through 427 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 61
Sleep Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 61
Feedback Signals in Open Loop ....................................................................................................................................................................... 65
PID for Process Regulation .................................................................................................................................................................................... 66
Feedback ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 66
Reference (Setpoint) ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 66
Inverse Regulation ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 66
Anti-windup ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 66
Start-up Conditions ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 66
Differentiator Gain Limit ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 67
Lowpass Filter .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 67
Optimization of the Process Regulator ................................................................................................................................................................ 67
PID Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 67
Feedback Handling .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 67
Serial Communication for FC Protocol .................................................................................................................................................................... 72
Protocols .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 72
Packet Communication ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 72
Serial Communication
Parameters 500 through 566 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 82
Warning Words, Extended Status Word and Alarm Word ................................................................................................................................... 88
Service Functions
Parameters 600 through 631 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 90
Relay Card Functions
Parameters 700 through 711 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 95
Electrical Installation of the Relay Card .............................................................................................................................................................. 95
Status Messages ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Warnings and Alarms ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 98
Warnings .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 99
Alarms .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 99
Factory Settings ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 104

SOFTWARE VERSION NOTICE: These Operating Instructions are used for all VLT 6000
Series Drives with software version 2.X and all prior versions. The software version number can be determined from parameter 624, Software Version.
4

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

General
The specific installation instructions may vary depending upon the model of VLT 6000 Series being installed. When this occurs, the model can be identified by a “VLT Type 6XXX” number. This number can be found on the red nameplate on the outside left side of the drive enclosure, or the outside right side of a drive with an auxiliary enclosure. A cross reference from the VLT Type to the model number can be found on the next page.
The drive must always be installed vertically. To ensure that no injury or damage occurs, the drive must always be firmly attached to the wall or the floor before further installation work is carried out.

Clearances
The drive is cooled by air circulation. For proper cooling, the minimum distances above and below the unit must be maintained as shown in the table below. For units in an auxiliary enclosure with the drive mounted on a backpanel, the required clearances are measured from the top and bottom of the drive, not the backpanel.
Drive Size

X

X
Bottom Clearance

4" (100mm)

4" (100mm)

8" (200mm)

8" (200mm)

9" (225mm)

9" (225mm)

150 to 300 HP, 380-460, 550-600 V

12" (300mm)

12" (300mm)

350 to 600 HP, 380-460 V

16" (400mm)

Floor mount

All drives can be mounted with no side clearance. Sufficient space must be provided in front of the drive for door swing on units with a hinged door. VLT drives 350 HP and above require 25 inches (605 mm) front space for access. In addition, sufficient room must be available for installation and service access. On units with an auxiliary enclosure, the auxiliary enclosure door will have a greater door swing than the drive. See the dimensional drawings of the auxiliary enclosure which are included with the drive.
Mount directly to the wall all drives without a backplate. This ensures that air flow is in contact with the heatsink all the way from the bottom of the drive. If this is not possible, a metal plate at least as large as the back of the drive must be firmly mounted to the back of the drive (see tables below). A backplate assembly is available from Danfoss.
NEMA 1
Backplate Required

Drive Size

Power

5 to 60 HP

200-240 V

15 to 300 HP

380-460 V

15 to 300 HP
550-600 V
Backplate Not Required
1 to 3 HP

200-240 V

1 to 10 HP
350 HP and above

380-460 V

1 to 10 HP

550-600 V

NEMA 12
Backplate Required

Drive Size
All drives

Power
200-240 V

1 to 75 HP
380-460 V
Backplate Not Required
100 HP and above

Plenum Mounting
The drive is UL rated for plenum mounting. If the drive is to be mounted in the plenum, allow sufficient access for servicing. All normal clearance, temperature and humidity limitations apply. Auxiliary panels that may be supplied with the drive are not UL rated for plenum mounting. Grounding Plate

Top Clearance

1 to 3 HP, 200-240 V
1 to 10 HP, 380-460, 550-600 V
5 to 30 HP, 200-240 V
15 to 75 HP, 380-460, 550-600 V
40 to 60 HP, 200-240 V
100 to 125 HP, 380-460, 550-600 V

Drives without a backplate must be mounted directly to a solid wall with no spacers between the drive and the wall. Free-standing drives without a backplate require a backplate to be mounted. 380-460 V

Drives up to 3 HP, 200 to 240 V, and up to 10 HP, 380 to 460 V and
550 to 600 V with a NEMA 1 enclosure have a plastic bottom cover with provision for conduit entry. To meet UL requirements, the metal grounding plate must be in place above the plastic bottom cover. The plate must be grounded to the chassis and the conduit grounded to the plate. If the grounding plate is not factory installed, it must be installed in the drives that have a plastic bottom panel to ensure proper grounding of the conduit to the enclosure. Connect the ground wire from the grounding plate to the ground tab marked with the ground symbol.
This tab is located near the AC line terminal strip. Mount the bottom cover on the control unit.

Shielded Wires
Wires to control signals should be shielded to reduce radio frequency noise interference. When RFI is a concern, shielded cable should be used between the drive and the motor.
If unshielded control wires are used, control inputs are subject to signal disturbances. Such disturbances may affect drive operation. Extreme noise levels may disturb the microprocessor of the control card.
The shield of the control wires must be grounded at the cable clamp at the bottom of the drive, but the shield must continue with the cable all the way up to the control card. The shield is not to be connected to any of the terminals on the control card. For safety reasons, the insulation around the shield should only be removed where it is connected to the cable clamp. The insulation should be left on the shield between the clamp and the terminals.
Generally speaking, all conductors coming from a shielded control cable must be as short as possible. Long conductor ends attract noise.
The shield must be connected to the chassis by means of the cable clamp. Long pigtails on the shield reduce the effectiveness of the shield.

UL, C-UL, and CE Conformity
All 200-240 V and 380-460 V VLT 6000 adjustable frequency drives are CE marked. All drives and option packages are UL and C-UL listed.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

5

230 V Input

Cross Reference —
Model Number to VLT Type

VLT Type

208 V Input
VLT Type
6002
6002
6003
6004
6006
6008
6011
6016
6022
6027
6032
6042
6052
6062

Max. Nominal Max. Drive
Output HP Output Current
1

2
3
5

10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60

4.6
6.6
7.5
10.6
16.7
24.2
30.8
46.2
59.4
74.8
88
114
143
169

460 V Input
VLT Type
6002
6002
6003
6004
6006
6008
6011
6016
6022
6027
6032
6042
6052
6062
6072
6100
6125
6150
6175
6225
6275
6350
6400
6500
6550

6

Max. Nominal Max. Drive
Output HP Output Current
1

2
3
5

10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
450
500
600

2.1
3.0
3.4
4.8
8.2
11.0
14
21
27
34
40
52
65
77
106
130
160
190
240
302
361
443
540
590
678

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

6002
6002
6003
6004
6006
6008
6011
6016
6022
6027
6032
6042
6052
6062

Max. Nominal Max. Drive
Output HP Output Current
1

2
3
5

10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60

4.2
6.6
7.5
10.6
16.7
24.2
30.8
46.2
59.4
74.8
88
104
130
154

380 V Input
VLT Type
6002
6003
6004
6005
6006
6008
6011
6016
6022
6027
6032
6042
6052
6062
6075
6100
6125
6150
6175
6225
6275

Max. Nominal Max. Drive
Output kW Output Current
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200

3.0
4.1
5.6
7.2
10
13
16
24
32
37.5
44
61
73
90
106
147
177
212
260
315
368

600 V Input
VLT Type
6002
6003
6004
6005
6006
6008
6011
6016
6022
6027
6032
6042
6052
6062
6072
6100
6125
6150
6175
6225
6275

Max. Nominal
Max. Drive
Output HP Output Current

2
3
4
5

10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
275

2.4
2.7
3.9
4.9
6.1
9
11
17
22
27
32
41
52
62
77
99
125
144
192
242
289

Input Fuses

600 Volt Input

All drives must be protected with branch circuit fuses in accordance with the National Electrical Code. To comply with UL508C, input fuses shown in the tables below must be installed in the power supply to drives which are 208 V above 30 HP, and 460 V and 600 V drives above 75 HP. The fuse ratings in the tables below are the recommended maximum ratings. Danfoss recommends input fuses on all drives. If specified as a drive option, input fuses will be installed by
Danfoss Graham in an enclosure external to the drive, which may include other optional features. If not supplied, they must be provided by the drive installer as part of installation.

VLT Type
6002
6003
6004
6005
6006
6008
6011
6016
6027
6032
6042
6052
6062
6072
6100
6125
6150
6175
6225
6275

208 Volt Input
VLT Type
6002
6003
6003
6004
6006
6008
6011
6016
6022
6027
6032
6042
6052
6062

Ma x im um Fuse
Rating (Am ps)
10
15
20
25
50
50
50
60
80
125
125
150
200
250

Bussm a n Type
KTN-R or JJN
KTN-R or JJN
KTN-R or JJN
KTN-R or JJN
KTN-R or JJN
KTN-R or JJN
KTN-R or JJN
KTN-R or JJN
KTN-R or JJN
KTN-R or JJN
KTN-R or JJN
FW X or FW H
FW X or FW H
FW X or FW H

Ma ximum Fuse
Ra ting (Am ps)
3
4
5
6
8
10
15
20
35
45
60
75
90
100
125
175
200
250
350
400

Bussm an Type
KTS-R or similar
KTS-R or similar
KTS-R or similar
KTS-R or similar
KTS-R or similar
KTS-R or similar
KTS-R or similar
KTS-R or similar
KTS-R or similar
KTS-R or similar
KTS-R or similar
KTS-R or similar
KTS-R or similar
KTS-R or similar
FWP
FWP
FWP
FWP
FWP
FWP

NOTE
On input power, Ferraz-Shawmut fuses, type
ATMR, Class CC, up to 30 A maximum, may be used on all VLT series drives.
200-240 V drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of supplying a maximum of 100,000 A RMS (symmetrical), 250 V maximum.
380-460 V drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of supplying a maximum of 100,000 A RMS (symmetrical), 500 V maximum.
550-600 V drives designed for protection in a circuit capable of supplying a maximum of 100,000 A RMS (symmetrical), 600 V maximum.

460 Volt Input

Internal Drive Fuses
Ma x im um Fuse
VLT Type Rating (Am ps)
6002
6
6003
10
6004
10
6006
20
6008
25
6011
30
6016
40
6022
40
6027
50
6032
60
6042
80
6052
100
6062
125
6075
150
6100
200
6125
250
6150
300
6175
350
6225
400
6275
500
6350
600
6400
700
6500
800
6550
800

Bussm a n Type
KTS-R or JJS
KTS-R or JJS
KTS-R or JJS
KTS-R or JJS
KTS-R or JJS
KTS-R or JJS
KTS-R or JJS
KTS-R or JJS
KTS-R or JJS
KTS-R or JJS
KTS-R or JJS
KTS-R or JJS
KTS-R or JJS
FW H
FW H
FW H
FW H
FW H
FW H
FW H
FW H
FW H
FW H
FW H

The table below specifies fuses used internally in the VLT 6000 series drives. Use the specified fuse or an exact replacement only.
200 – 240 VAC
VLT Type
6042
6052
6062

Soft Charge Fuse
(3 phase)
Littelfuse KLK-15
Littelfuse KLK-15
Littelfuse KLK-15

Soft Charge Resistor
Fuse (1 phase)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12
Littelfuse KLK-D-12
Littelfuse KLK-D-12

Power Card
Fuse (1 phase)
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5

380 – 460 VAC
VLT Type
6075
6100
6125
6150
6175
6225
6275
VLT Type
6350
6400
6500
6550

Soft Charge
Fuse (3 phase)
Littelfuse KLK-15
Littelfuse KLK-15
Littelfuse KLK-15
Littelfuse KLK-30
Littelfuse KLK-30
Littelfuse KLK-30
Littelfuse KLK-30
Soft Charge
Fuse (3 phase)
Littelfuse KLK-9
Littelfuse KLK-9
Littelfuse KLK-9
Littelfuse KLK-9

Soft Charge Resistor
Fuse (1 or 2 phase)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (2X)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (1X)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (1X)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (1X)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (2X)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (2X)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (2X)
Line Snubber
Fuse (3 phase)
Littelfuse KLK-15
Littelfuse KLK-15
Littelfuse KLK-15
Littelfuse KLK-15

Power Card
Fuse (1 phase)
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5
Interface Board
Fuse (1 phase)
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5

550 – 600 VAC
VLT Type
6100
6125
6150
6175
6225
6275

Soft Charge
Fuse (3 phase)
Littelfuse KLK-15
Littelfuse KLK-15
Littelfuse KLK-15
Littelfuse KLK-30
Littelfuse KLK-30
Littelfuse KLK-30

Soft Charge Resistor
Fuse (1 or 2 phase)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (1X)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (1X)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (1X)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (2X)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (2X)
Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (2X)

Power Card
Fuse (1 phase)
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5
Bussmann KTK-5

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

7

Locations of Conduit Entry, Terminal Blocks and Switches
The following drawings illustrate the locations of the conduit entry, control terminal blocks, the auxiliary relay connections, input and output power terminal blocks, and the internal switches.

On drives with an auxiliary enclosure, some or all of the power connections at the drive will be factory made. Custom input and output terminals may be inside the auxiliary enclosure. See the drawings supplied with the drive for details on custom terminal blocks and conduit entry locations for the auxiliary enclosure.

NEMA 1

VLT 6002-6032, 200 to 240 V
VLT 6002-6072, 380 to 460 V
VLT 6002-6072, 550 to 600 V

VLT 6042-6062, 200 to 240 V, VLT 6100-6125, 380 to 460 V
VLT 6100-6150, 550 to 600 V
8

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

VLT 6150-6275, 380 to 460 V
VLT 6175-6275, 550 to 600 V

Locations of Conduit Entry, Terminal Blocks and Switches (continued)

NEMA 12

VLT 6002-6005, 200 to 240 V, VLT 6002-6011, 380 to 460 V

VLT 6006-6032, 200 to 240 V; VLT 6016-6072, 380 to 460 V

VLT 6042-6062, 200 to 240 V; VLT 6100-6125, 380 to 460 V

VLT 6150-6275, 380 to 460 V
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

9

Locations of Conduit Entry, Terminal Blocks and Switches (continued)

NEMA 1 and NEMA 12

VLT 6350-6550, 380 to 460 V

10

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Location of Input Power (Mains) and Output
Power (Motor Terminal Blocks)
Connect input power to the terminals identified as L1, L2 and L3.
Connect the motor leads to the terminals identified as U, V and W.

NEMA 1 and NEMA 12
VLT 6002-6005, 200-240 V
VLT 6002-6011, 380-460 V
VLT 6002-6011, 550-600 V

! WARNING
Connecting input power to motor terminals will result in drive failure when the power is applied.

NEMA 1
VLT 6042-6062, 200-240 V
VLT 6100-6125, 380-460 V
VLT 6100-6150, 550-600 V

NEMA 1
VLT 6006-6032, 200-240 V
VLT 6016-6072, 380-460 V
VLT 6016-6072, 550-600 V

NEMA 1
VLT 6150-6275, 380-460 V
VLT 6175-6275, 550-600 V
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

11

Location of Input Power (Mains) and Output
Power (Motor Terminal Blocks), continued
Connect input power to the terminals identified as L1, L2 and L3.

NEMA 12
VLT 6006-6032, 200-240 V
VLT 6016-6072, 380-460 V

NEMA 12
VLT 6150-6275, 380-460 V

NEMA 12
VLT 6042-6062, 200-240 V
VLT 6100-6125, 380-460 V

12

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Location of Input Power (Mains) and Output
Power (Motor Terminal Blocks), continued
Connect input power to the terminals identified as L1, L2 and L3.

NEMA 1 and NEMA 12, VLT 6350-6550, 380-460 V without disconnector and mains fuses

NEMA 1 and NEMA 12, VLT 6350-6550, 380-460 V with disconnector and mains fuses
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

13

Power Connections

! WARNING

Make all power connections with 75o C rated copper wiring.
Conduit entry must be from the bottom on all drives. Conduit entries are provided on smaller drives. For drives with auxiliary enclosures, refer to the dimensional drawings provided for conduit entry locations.
To meet UL requirements, install the metal grounding plate in all drives that have a plastic bottom. Install the grounding plate just above the plastic bottom. Ground the metal plate to the chassis and ground the conduit to the metal plate.

Connecting input power to motor terminals will result in drive failure when power is applied.

Motor Wiring Connection
For drives with no auxiliary enclosure, connect the motor to drive terminals U, V, and W (terminal numbers 96, 97, and 98). Terminal 99 is earth ground. If an auxiliary enclosure is provided, refer to the connection diagrams shipped with the drive. Ground the shield on the motor wire, if used, at both the drive and the motor.

! DANGER

The conduit entries provide strain relief for the wires in drives mounted in NEMA 1 or NEMA 12 enclosures. With chassis mounted drives, the power and control wires must have strain relief supplied by the installer.
DO NOT rely on the terminal blocks to provide strain relief.

Grounding

Input Power Connection
For drives with no auxiliary enclosure, connect input power to drive terminals L1, L2, and L3, (terminal numbers 91, 92, and 93). If an auxiliary enclosure is provided, input power connections are made in the auxiliary enclosure. Refer to the connection diagrams shipped with the drive.
Size wiring to the input current of the drive as shown in the tables below. Maximum AWG wire size is also provided. Local codes must be complied with for cable sizes.

! CAUTION

Enclosures for larger drives and auxiliary enclosures are made of metal. To avoid getting metal chips into electronics, do not drill any holes after unit has been installed in a vertical position. Model
6002
6003
6004
6006
6008
6011
6016
6022
6027
6032
6042
6052
6062

208 VAC
Input Current/Wire Gage

All current ratings are in amps.

14

Ground the drive properly. Use a ground wire at least 7 AWG (10mm2).
Connect the ground wire directly to a reliable earth ground. Do not use the conduit connecting to the drive as a replacement for a ground wire. Do not ground one drive to another in a “daisy chain” fashion.

Electronic Thermal Protection
The electronic thermal relay is UL approved for single motor thermal protection as long as the following is complied with:
1.
2.

Incoming power, motor wiring and control wiring should be run in three separate conduits or raceways. Output motor cables from multiple drives must be run separately.

Drive Input Maximum
Current
AWG
5.0
10
7.0
10
10.0
10
16.0
10
23.0
6
30.0
6
46.0
6
59.2
2
74.8
2
88.0
0
101.3
1/0
126.6
3/0
149.9
4/0

For operator safety, it is important to ground drive properly.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Parameter 117, Thermal Protection, is set to ETR TRIP.
Parameter 105, Motor Current, is set for the full-load nameplate motor current.

Drive Input
Current
2.5
3.4
4.8
8.3
10.6
14
21
27.6
34
41
53
64
77
103
145
174
206
256
317
366
443
540
590
678

Maximum
AWG
10
10
10
10
10
10
6
6
6
6
2
2
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
2x1/0
2x1/0
2x3/0
2x4/0
3x1/0
3x3/0
3x3/0
3x4/0

Model
6002
6003
6004
6006
6008
6011
6016
6022
6027
6032
6042
6052
6062
6072
6100
6125
6150
6175
6225
6275
6350
6400
6500
6550

Drive Input Maximum
Current
AWG
2.2
10
2.5
10
3.6
10
4.6
10
5.7
10
8.4
10
10.3
10
16.6
6
20.5
6
25.2
6
29.9
2
38.3
2
48.5
1/0
57.9
1/0
71.8
1/0
92
4/0
117
4/0
134
4/0
179
2 x 4/0
226
2 x 4/0
270
2 x 4/0

Model
6002
6003
6004
6005
6006
6008
6011
6016
6022
6027
6032
6042
6052
6062
6072
6100
6125
6150
6175
6225
6275

460 VAC

600 VAC

Input Current/Wire Gage

Input Current/Wire Gage

Terminal Tightening Torque
Tighten terminals connecting the drive input power, output to the motor(s) and ground to the values shown in the tables below. Drives with 200 to
240 volts of 88 amps and less, and drives with 380 to 575 volts of 90 amps and less, have removable terminal blocks with screws. Larger drives have fixed bolts. (See the drive nameplate for maximum drive output current.)

NOTE
Tighten terminals of 575 volt drives of 32 amps and below to 17 in-lbs (1.9 Nm), and above 32 amps to 28 in-lbs (3.0 Nm).

200 to 240 VAC Terminal Tightening Torque

380 to 460 VAC Terminal Tightening Torque

Max. Drive
Output Current
6.6
7.5
10.6
16.7
24.2
30.8
46.2
59.4
74.8
88
114
143
169

Torque in-lbs (Nm)
5 (0.6)
5 (0.6)
5 (0.6)
5 (0.6)
17 (1.8)
17 (1.8)
28 (3.0)
28 (3.0)
28 (3.0)
35 (4.0)
100 (11.3)
100 (11.3)
100 (11.3)

Max. Drive
Output Current

Torque in-lbs (Nm)

Max. Drive
Output Current

Torque in-lbs (Nm)

to 10
16
24
32
37.5
44
61
73
90
106

5 (0.6)
5 (0.6)
17 (1.8)
17 (1.8)
17 (1.8)
28 (3.0)
28 (3.0)
28 (3.0)
28 (3.0)
100 (11.3)

147
177
212
260
315
368
487
594
649
746

100 (11.3)
100 (11.3)
100 (11.3)
100 (11.3)
100 (11.3)
100 (11.3)
372 (42.0)
372 (42.0)
372 (42.0)
372 (42.0)

All current ratings are in amps.

200 to 208 VAC Auxiliary Control Panel Tightening Torques
200-208 V Max
Output

Overload
Relay

In/Out Power
Terminal

CTK Breaker

Main Disco
Switch

Drive Disco
Switch

MN/BYP Fuse
BLK

Drive Fuse
BLK

Ground
Terminal

4.6 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

35 (4.0)

45 (5.1)

6.6 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

35 (4.0)

45 (5.1)

7.5 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

35 (4.0)

45 (5.1)

10.6 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

35 (4.0)

45 (5.1)

16.7 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

24.2 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

30.8 A

17 (1.9)

35 (4.0)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

46 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

44 (5)

18 (2)

18 (2)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

50 (5.6)

59.4 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

44 (5)

18 (2)

18 (2)

120 (13.6)

120 (13.6)

50 (5.6)

74.8 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

44 (5)

55 (6.2)

55 (6.2)

120 (13.6)

275 (30.1)

50 (5.6)

88 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

44 (5)

70 (7.9)

70 (7.9)

120 (13.6)

275 (30.1)

50 (5.6)

114 A

200 (22.6)

275 (30.1)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

275 (31.1)

N/A

50 (5.6)

143 A

200 (22.6)

275 (30.1)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

275 (31.1)

N/A

50 (5.6)

169 A

200 (22.6)

275 (30.1)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

450 (50.8)

N/A

275 (30.1)

Current ratings are in amps. Torques are in in-lbs (Nm). All TB1 connections must be torqued to 8 in-lbs (0.9 Nm).
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

15

Terminal Tightening Torque (continued)

230 to 240 VAC Auxiliary Control Panel Tightening Torques
230-240 V Max
Output

Ove rload
Relay

In/Out Pow e r
Term inal

CTK Breaker

Main Disco
Sw itch

Drive Disco
Sw itch

MN/BYP Fuse
BLK

Drive Fuse
BLK

Ground
Term inal

4.2 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

35 (4.0)

45 (5.1)

6.6 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

35 (4.0)

45 (5.1)

7.5 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

35 (4.0)

45 (5.1)

10.6 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

35 (4.0)

45 (5.1)

16.7 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

35 (4.0)

45 (5.1)

24.2 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

30.8 A

17 (1.9)

35 (4.0)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

46.2 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

44 (5)

18 (2)

18 (2)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

50 (5.6)

59.4 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

44 (5)

18 (2)

18 (2)

120 (13.6)

120 (13.6)

50 (5.6)

74.8 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

44 (5)

55 (6.2)

18 (2)

120 (13.6)

275 (30.1)

50 (5.6)

88 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

275 (30.1)

70 (7.9)

55 (6.2)

275 (31.1)

275 (30.1)

50 (5.6)

104 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

70 (7.9)

275 (31.1)

N/A

50 (5.6)

130 A

200 (22.6)

275 (30.1)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

275 (31.1)

N/A

50 (5.6)

154 A

200 (22.6)

275 (30.1)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

450 (50.8)

N/A

275 (30.1)

380 to 460 VAC Auxiliary Control Panel Tightening Torques
380-460 V Max
Output

Overload
Relay

In/Out Power
Terminal

CTK Breaker

Main Disco
Switch

Drive Disco
Switch

MN/BYP Fuse
BLK

Drive Fuse
BLK

Ground
Terminal

2.1 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

3.0 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

4.1 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

5.6 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

8.2 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

11.0 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

16 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

24 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

32 A

17 (1.9)

35 (4.0)

22 (2.5)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

37.5 A

17 (1.9)

35 (4.0)

22 (2.5)

18 (2)

7 (.8)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

44 A

40 (4.5)

35 (4.0)

22 (2.5)

18 (2)

18 (2)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

50 (5.6)

61 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

44 (5)

18 (2)

18 (2)

45 (5.1)

120 (13.6)

50 (5.6)

73 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

44 (5)

55 (6.2)

18 (2)

120 (13.6)

120 (13.6)

50 (5.6)

90 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

44 (5)

70 (7.9)

55 (6.2)

120 (13.6)

275 (30.1)

50 (5.6)

106 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

70 (7.9)

275 (31.1)

N/A

50 (5.6)

147 A

200 (22.6)

275 (30.1)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

275 (31.1)

N/A

50 (5.6)

177 A

200 (22.6)

275 (30.1)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

275 (31.1)

N/A

275 (30.1)

212 A

200 (22.6)

275 (30.1)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

450 (50.8)

500 (56.5)

275 (30.1)

260 A

200 (22.6)

375 (42.4)

275 (30.1)

500 (56.8)

500 (56.8)

450 (50.8)

500 (56.5)

275 (30.1)

315 A

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

275 (30.1)

500 (56.8)

500 (56.8)

450 (50.8)

275 (30.1)

275 (30.1)

368 A

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

275 (30.1)

500 (56.8)

500 (56.8)

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

275 (30.1)

Current ratings are in amps. Torques are in in-lbs (Nm). All TB1 connections must be torqued to 8 in-lbs (0.9 Nm).
16

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Terminal Tightening Torque (continued)

550 to 600 VAC Auxiliary Control Panel Tightening Torques

550-600 V Max
Output

Overload
Relay

In/Out Power
Terminal

CTK Breaker

Main Disco
Switch

Drive Disco
Switch

MN/BYP Fuse
BLK

Drive Fuse
BLK

Ground
Terminal

1.7 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

50 (5.6)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

2.4 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

50 (5.6)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

2.7 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

50 (5.6)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

3.9 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

50 (5.6)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

6.1 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

50 (5.6)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

9.0 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

50 (5.6)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

11.0 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

50 (5.6)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

17 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

50 (5.6)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

25 (2.8)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

22 A

17 (1.9)

15 (1.7)

50 (5.6)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

27 A

17 (1.9)

35 (4.0)

50 (5.6)

7 (.8)

7 (.8)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

45 (5.1)

32 A

17 (1.9)

35 (4.0)

50 (5.6)

18 (2)

18 (2)

45 (5.1)

120 (13.6)

45 (5.1)

41 A

40 (4.5)

35 (4.0)

50 (5.6)

18 (2)

18 (2)

45 (5.1)

120 (13.6)

50 (5.6)

52 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

50 (5.6)

70 (7.9)

55 (6.2)

120 (13.6)

120 (13.6)

50 (5.6)

62 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

50 (5.6)

70 (7.9)

55 (6.2)

120 (13.6)

120 (13.6)

50 (5.6)

77 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

275 (30.1)

70 (7.9)

55 (6.2)

120 (13.6)

120 (13.6)

50 (5.6)

99 A

40 (4.5)

175 (19.8)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

70 (7.9)

275 (31.1)

275 (30.1)

50 (5.6)

125 A

200 (22.6)

275 (30.1)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

275 (31.1)

N/A

50 (5.6)

144 A

200 (22.6)

275 (30.1)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

275 (31.1)

N/A

275 (30.1)

192 A

200 (22.6)

275 (30.1)

275 (30.1)

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

450 (50.8)

N/A

275 (30.1)

242 A

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

275 (30.1)

500 (56.8)

500 (56.8)

450 (50.8)

500 (56.5)

275 (30.1)

289 A

375 (42.4)

375 (42.4)

275 (30.1)

500 (56.8)

500 (56.8)

375 (42.4)

275 (30.1)

275 (30.1)

Current ratings are in amps. Torques are in in-lbs (Nm). All TB1 connections must be torqued to 8 in-lbs (0.9 Nm).
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

17

Multiple Motors
The VLT 6000 can control several motors at once, all changing speed together. The sum of the nameplate currents of all the motors must not exceed the current rating of the drive.

! WARNING

When multiple motors are used,VLT 6000 electronic thermal relay cannot be used to provide individual motor protection. A separate motor overload must be supplied for each motor.
If the multiple motors are of significantly different sizes, starting problems may occur. This is because the higher electrical resistance of smaller motors will require more start voltage than larger motors.
NOTE
Automatic Motor Adaptation and Automatic
Energy Optimization cannot be used for multiple motor installations.

External DC Bus Connection
Terminals 88 and 89 access the DC bus of the drive. They can provide
DC backup power for the drive or to connect to a 12-pulse input rectifier. ! DANGER
Terminals 88 and 89 will be at approximately
150% of line voltage and remain at high voltage for up to 14 minutes after power has been removed from the drive.

! WARNING
Do not connect anything to terminals 88 and 89 without first consulting with Danfoss Graham.

High Voltage Form C Relay
The connections for the high-voltage relay are terminals 01, 02, 03.
The high-voltage relay is programmed in parameter 323, Relay
Output 1.
1+3 normally closed, 1+2 normally open
Max. 240 VAC, 2 Amp
Min. 24 VDC, 10 mA or
24 VAC, 100 mA
Max. wire gage: 10 AWG (4 mm2)
Terminal Torque: 5 in-lbs ( 0.5 - 0.6 Nm)

Electronic Control Terminals
18

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Control Connections
All terminals for the low voltage control wires are located under the protective cover below the keypad. Remove the cover with a screwdriver or other pointed object as shown below.

The following is a description of the functions of the control terminals.
Many of these terminals have multiple functions determined by parameter settings.
Terminal No.
01, 02, 03

Function
Form C relay output. Maximum 240 VAC, 2 A.
Minimum 24 VDC, 10 mA or 24 VAC, 100 mA.
(Location of Form C relay output varies with unit type. See connection diagram with unit for location.) 04, 05

30 VAC, 42.5 VDC, 1 A relay output can be used for indicating status and warnings.

12, 13

Voltage supply to digital inputs and external transducers. For the 24 VDC to be used for digital inputs, switch 4 on the control card must be closed, position “on.” The maximum output current is 200 mA.

16 - 33

Digital inputs. R = 2 kohm. <5 V = logical “0”,
>10 V = logical “1”. See parameters 300 through
307, Digital Inputs.

20

Common for digital inputs.

39

Common for analog and digital outputs.

42, 45

Analog and digital outputs for indicating frequency, reference, current and torque. The analog signal is 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20 mA at a maximum of
500 Ω. The digital signal is 24 VDC at a minimum of 600 Ω. See parameters 319-322, Analog/digital
Outputs.

50

10 VDC, 17 mA maximum analog supply voltage to potentiometer and thermistor.

53, 54
55

0 to 10 VDC voltage input, R = 10 kΩ.
Common for analog inputs. This common is isolated from the common of all other power supplies. If, for example, the drive’s 24 VDC power supply is used to power an external transducer which provides an analog input signal, terminal 55 must be wired to terminal 39.

60

0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA, analog current input, R
= 188 Ω. See parameters 314 through 316.

61

Shield for serial communication.

68, 69

RS-485 interface and serial communication. When the drive is connected to an RS-485 serial communication bus, DIP switch settings on the control card may have to be reset. See Dip
Switches 1 through 4 in this manual.

Electrical Installation, Control Terminals
Torque control terminals to 5 in-lbs (0.5-0.6 N-m)
Max. wire size: 16 AWG (1.5mm2)
The diagram below shows the location of the control terminals. The programming section of the manual covers the programmable terminals in greater depth.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

19

Typical Control Connections
Shown below are typical interfaces between the VLT 6000 and other components in an HVAC system. The terminal numbers and the functions of the terminals are identical on all VLT 6000s. An optional relay card, not shown, can provide four additional Form C output relays. The RS-485 connections allow direct communication through

the drive’s built-in serial communication protocols: Johnson Controls
Metasys® N2, Siemens System 600 FLN®, or VLT Software Dialog®.
Modbus, LonWorks® and Profibus® are available through option cards that fit into the relay output card location.

Typical* VLT 6000 Wiring

91 (L1)
92 (L2)

(V) 97

93 (L3)

(W) 98

99 (PE)

3 Phase
Power
Input

(U) 96

(PE) 95

External
DC Bus
Connection

88 (-)

+10 V DC

50 (+10 V OUT)

Switch Mode
Power Supply

89 (+)

10 V DC
17 mA
+
-

24 V DC
200 mA
+
-

0 - 10 V DC
Ref. Input*

53 (A IN)

0 - 10 V DC
Ref. Input*

54 (A IN)

(AUX RELAY) 01

55 (COM A IN)

( AUX RELAY) 02

60 (A IN)

(AUX RELAY) 03

4 - 20 mA
Ref. Input*

12 (+24 V OUT)

Reset*

(RELAY) 04

13 (+24 V OUT)

Fault Indication*
240 V AC, 2 A

Run Indication*
30 V AC, 1 A

(RELAY) 05
(COM A OUT) 39

16 (D IN)
5V

Lockout*

18 (D IN)

Reverse*

19 (D IN)
20 (COM D IN)

Output Speed Indication*
4 - 20 mA

0V
SW2
SW4

RS-485
Interface

SW3

(A OUT) 45
(P RS-485) 68

Interlock*

27 (D IN)

(N RS-485) 69

Preset Speed*

29 (D IN)

(COM RS-485) 61

Setup Select*

32 (D IN)

Setup Select*

33 (D IN)
* The operation of all control inputs and outputs is programmable.
* Typical terminal functions are shown.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Output Current Indication*
4 - 20 mA

(A OUT) 42

17 (D IN)

Run/Stop*

20

Motor

+
RS-485
-

DIP Switches 1 through 4

! CAUTION

DIP switches are located on the control card.

Incoming power, motor wiring and control wiring should be run in three separate conduits or raceways.

They are used for serial communication and the common of digital inputs 16 through 33. The switch positions shown are the factory settings. Electrical Installation, Control Wiring
Torque: 5 - 6 in-lbs
Screw size: M3
Shielded control wires are recommended. To reduce interference from electrical noise, ground the cable shield at a cable clamp, as shown below, at both ends. Connect the shield to the grounded clamp. Very long control wires may create 60 Hz interference. To resolve this, connect one end of the shield to earth with a 0.1 µF capacitor, keeping the leads as short as possible. If interference persists, disconnect the grounded shield connection at the end opposite to the drive.

Switch 1 is not used.
Switches 2 and 3 are used for terminating serial communication. On the first and last drive in a multiple device network, or on the only drive of a single drive network, switches 2 and 3 must be ON (the default setting).
On all other drives in a multiple device network, set switches 2 and 3 to
OFF.
Switch 4 separates the common for the internal 24 VDC supply from the common of the external 24 VDC supply. Normally this switch is ON and the power supply is present at terminals 12 and 13. Set Switch 4 to the
OFF position when an external 24 VDC supply is used.

Ground Leakage Current
It is normal for there to be some leakage current from the drive to earth ground. Paths of current leakage are shown on the drawing below.
The leakage current will exceed 3.5 mA.

Paths of Normal Current Leakage to Ground

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

21

Galvanic Isolation

Electrical Noise

Galvanic isolation offers protection from electric shock. All control terminals of all VLT 6000 drives, and terminals 1 through 3 of the relay output, offer galvanic isolation. The galvanic isolation in the VLT 6000 conforms to the European standard EN 50178. (See figure below.)

In general, electrical noise can be divided into two forms: wire-borne electromagnetic interference (EMI), and radiating radio frequency interference (RFI).

The components that make up the galvanic isolation are:
1.
2.
3.

Power supply, including signal isolation.
Gate drive for the IGBTs, the trigger transformers and optocouplers.
The output current Hall effect transducers.

Using shielded motor cables reduces RFI but increases EMI. This is because shielded wires have a greater capacitance than unshielded wires. Unshielded input power connections to the drive generate more noise in the radio frequency range on the AC line. The shield reduces the radiated noise, but increases the low-frequency electromagnetic noise on the AC line. But, since the noise current is taken back to the unit through the shield, only a small electromagnetic field is generated from shielded motor wires.
With an EMI filter, the noise level on the AC line will be reduced to about the same level for shielded and unshielded wires alike.
Connect the motor wiring shield, if used, in the enclosure of the drive as well as at the motor. Use shield brackets to avoid “pigtail” shield ends.
Even short “pigtails” increase the shield’s impedance at higher frequencies, which reduces the shield’s effect and increases the noise produced. Galvanic Isolation

Extra Safety Protection
Residual Current Device (RCD) relays for ground fault protection, or multiple protective grounding, can be used as extra safety protection, provided that local safety regulations are complied with. In case of a grounding fault, the fault current may contain a DC component. If RCD relays, also known as Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCB), are used, they may be suitable for protection of 3-phase equipment with a bridge rectifier and for a brief current surge at power-up.
Since leakage current is greater than 3.5 mA, reinforced grounding must be provided if compliance with EN 50178 is required. The relays must be suitable to meet the following requirements:
1) protecting equipment with a DC content (Din VDE 0664) in the fault current (3-phase rectifier)
2) power-up with short pulse-shaped charging current to ground
3) high leakage currents
RCD fault relays type B comply with these requirements according to the norm IEC 755-2.

22

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

It is generally easier and less complicated to use unshielded motor wires than shielded cables. If unshielded wires are used, the RFI will be greater. But, since the strength of the radiated signal decreases with distance from the signal source, radiated noise is generally not a problem. To reduce the noise level from the total system (drive + installation) make the motor wiring as short as possible.
Provide separate conduits, or raceways, for power, motor and control wiring to provide the greatest immunity from distortion.

Application Control Connection Examples
Two-wire Start/Stop
In Auto mode, closing the contact to terminal 18 will make the drive run.
In any mode, opening the safety interlock contact to terminal 27 will stop the drive.

Run Permissive
After receiving a run command, the drive will apply power to the damper motor and wait until it receives “permission” via the switch that is connected to terminal 16.

Set Parameter 300 to Run Permissive.
Set Parameter 302 to Start.
Set Parameter 304 to External Fault.
Set Parameter 323 to Start Signal Applied.

Two Feedback Signals
Set Parameter 302 to Start.
Set Parameter 304 to Safety Interlock.

Digital Speed Up/down
Closing the switch to terminal 32 will make the drive accelerate. Closing the switch to terminal 33 will make the drive decelerate.

The drive processes two independent feedback signals during closed loop operation. It can respond to the sum, difference, average, minimum or maximum of these signals.
Set Parameter 308 to Feedback.
Set Parameter 311 to Feedback
Set Parameter 417 for the desired operation.

Transmitter Connection

Set Parameter 306 to Speed up.
Set Parameter 307 to Speed down.
Set Parameter 305 to Freeze reference.

The drive’s internal 24
VDC power supply is used to power an external 4 to 20 mA transducer. Potentiometer Reference
A manual potentiometer is used as a input reference for the drive.
Set Parameter 314, Terminal 60, Analog Input Current, to correspond to the purpose of the 4 to 20 mA signal.
Set Parameter 315, Terminal 60, Min. Scaling, to 4 mA
Set Parameter 316, Terminal 60, Max. Scaling, to 20 mA.

Set Parameter 308, Terminal 53, Analog Input Voltage, to Reference.
Set Parameter 309, Terminal 53, Min. Scaling, to 0 V.
Set Parameter 310, Terminal 53, Max. Scaling, to 10 V.

Because the commons of the +24 VDC power supply and the input reference follower have separate circuit commons, it is necessary to connect a jumper between terminals 39 and 55.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

23

Control Panel
The Local Control Panel (LCP), normally mounted on the front of the drive, is a complete interface for programming and operating the drive.
The control panel can be removed from the drive and installed up to 10 feet (3 meters) from the drive by using a remote mounting kit.
The control panel has five functions:
1. Display
2. Keys for changing the display
3. Keys for changing programming parameters
4. Indicator lamps
5. Keys for controlling drive operation

The LCP uses a four-line, alpha-numeric, back-lit, LCD display. The display can show four operating data values and three operating condition values continuously. During programming, all the information required for quick, effective parameter setup of the drive will be displayed. As a supplement to the display, there are three indicator lamps for power on (ON), warning (WARNING) and alarm (ALARM).
All drive parameters can be changed from the control panel, unless this ability has been locked out by setting parameter 016, Lock for Data
Change, to Locked, or by a digital input to terminals 16 through 33. See the related parameters for more information.

Keys for Parameter Changes
The keys are divided into groups by function. The keys between the display and indicator lamps are used for parameter setup, selecting the display indication during normal operation and controlling the drive speed during local speed control operation. The keys below the indicator lamps are used for Start/Stop control and selection of the operating site.

The QUICK MENU key gives access to the parameters available for the Quick Menu setup. Parameters in this menu are the 12 most important setup parameters for the drive.
The EXTEND MENU key gives access to all parameters.
The CHANGE DATA key is used for changing the value of a parameter selected either in the Extend Menu or the Quick Menu mode. The desired parameter is first selected. Then the CHANGE DATA key is pressed to enable the editing of the parameter. The underline in the display will move under the parameter’s value to show that it is being edited.
The CANCEL key is used if a change of the selected parameter is not to be carried out.

The DISPLAY MODE key is used to change the mode of the display or to return to the Display Mode from either the Quick Menu or the Extend Menu mode.

24

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

The OK key is used for confirming a change of the parameter selected.

The + and - keys are used to scroll through parameters and to change the value of a chosen parameter. These keys are also used to change the local reference. In
Display Mode, these keys are used to switch between readouts. The L and M keys are used to select a parameter group and also to move the cursor to the desired digit when changing numerical values.

Indicator Lamps
At the bottom of the control panel is a red alarm LED, a yellow warning
LED, and a green power on LED.

red

yellow

green

If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or warning lamps will flash and text describing the alarm or warning condition will be displayed.

Local Control

Below the indicator lamps are keys which are used to determine the point of control. Each of these keys can be individually enabled or disabled using parameter 012 through 015. The Hand Start and Auto
Start keys will also be disabled if any of the control terminals are programmed for either Remote Hand or Remote Auto.
The HAND START key is used if the drive is to be started from the control panel. Pressing HAND START will give a start command to the drive.

! WARNING

If a minimum speed is set in parameter 201,
Output Frequency Low Limit, motor will start and ramp up to this frequency when HAND
START is pressed. If drive is already running in
Auto Mode when the HAND START key is pressed, it will switch to run in Hand Mode at same speed.

The OFF/STOP key is used for stopping the connected motor in either the Hand or Auto mode. Enable or disable via parameter 013. If this stop function is activated, the second line in the LCD display will flash.

AUTO START is used if the drive is to be started via the control terminals and/or serial communication. When a remote start signal is active, the drive will start if the
AUTO START key has been pressed.

! DANGER
A start signal via digital inputs may cause drive to start at any time. Remove power to drive before working on output wiring, motor or any driven equipment.

The RESET key is used for manually resetting the drive after a fault trip (alarm). In this case, the top line of the display will show TRIP (RESET). If the top line of the display shows TRIP (AUTO START), the drive will automatically restart. If the top line of the display shows
TRIPLOCK (DISC. MAINS), input power to the drive must be removed before the trip can be reset.

Display Modes
In Auto operational mode, information is displayed in any of three programmable displays. Pressing the DISPLAY MODE key enters display mode and toggles between modes I and II. While in Display mode, the [+] and [-] keys scroll through all data display options. When in Mode II, holding down the DISPLAY MODE key enters Mode III which identifies the units on the top line that the display is showing.
Mode IV is available only in local Hand operation and displays the local speed reference.
In normal operation, three data readouts can be shown on the first
(top) line of the display. Parameters 008, 009 and 010 select the data displayed on the top line. One readout is available for the large display
(line 2). Parameter 007, Large Display Readout, selects the data displayed on line 2. The list on the next page defines the operating data that can be selected for the display readouts.
During an alarm (fault trip), ALARM and the alarm number is shown on the large display. An explanation is given in line 3 or in lines 3 and 4.
For a warning, WARN. and the warning number is shown with an explanation in line 3 and/or 4. Both alarms and warnings cause the display to flash.
Line 4 (bottom line), in normal operation, automatically displays the operating status of the drive.
The active setup number and an arrow indicating the direction of motor rotation is shown on the right side of the large display. Clockwise indicates forward and counterclockwise indicates reverse. The arrow body is removed if a stop command is given or if the output frequency falls below 0.01 Hz.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

25

The table below gives the operating data options for the first and second lines of the display.
Data Item:
Resulting reference, %
Resulting reference
Frequency
% of maximum output frequency
Motor current
Power
Power
Output energy
Hours run
User defined readout
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2
Feedback 1
Feedback 2
Feedback
Motor voltage
DC link voltage
Thermal load on motor
Thermal load on VLT
Input status, digital input
Input status, analog terminal 53
Input status, analog terminal 54
Input status, analog terminal 60
Pulse reference
External reference
Heat sink temperature

Unit:
%
unit chosen in par. 415
Hz
%
A
kW
HP
kWh hours unit chosen in par. 006 unit chosen in par. 415 unit chosen in par. 415 unit chosen in par. 415 unit chosen in par. 415 unit chosen in par. 415
V
V
%
% binary code
V
V mA Hz
%
o
C

Display Mode I:
In Display mode I, the drive is in Auto mode with reference and control determined via the control terminals. Following is an example in which the drive is running in setup 1, in Auto mode, with a remote reference, and at an output frequency of 40 Hz.
The text in line 1, FREQUENCY, describes the meter shown in the large display. Line 2 (large display) shows the current output frequency (40.0 Hz), direction of rotation (reverse arrow), and active setup (1). Line 3 is blank. Line 4 is the status line and the information is automatically generated for display by the drive in response to its operation. It shows that the drive is in auto mode, with a remote reference, and that the motor is running.

FREQUENCY

40.0 Hz

SETUP

1

AUTO REMOTE RUN

26

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Status line (Line 4): Additional automatic displays for the drive status line are shown below. See Status Messages section in this manual for additional information.

80.0%

5.08A

2.15k
W

40.0 Hz

SETUP

1

AUTO REM.
RUNNING
HAND LOCAL STOP
RAMPING
OFF
JOGGING
.
.
.
.
STAND BY
The left indicator on the status line displays the active control mode of the VLT drive. AUTO is displayed when control is via the control terminals. HAND indicates that control is local via the keys on the LCP.
OFF indicates that the drive ignores all control commands and will not run. The center part of the status line indicates the reference element that is active. REM. (Remote) means that reference from the control terminals is active, while LOCAL indicates that the reference is determined via the
[+] and [-] keys on the control panel.
The last part of line 4 indicates the drive's operational status, for example: RUNNING, STOP, or RUN REQUEST, and so on.

Display Mode II:
This display mode shows three operating data values in the top line programmed via parameters 008, 009, and 010. Pressing the
DISPLAY MODE key toggles between Display modes I and II.

100%

7.8A

5.9kW

50.0 Hz

AUTO REMOTE RUN

SETUP

1

Display Mode III:

Changing Numeric Values

Press and hold the [DISPLAY MODE] key while in Mode II. Mode III is visible as long as the key is depressed. The top line changes to identify the data names and units displayed. Lines 2 and 4 are unchanged.
When the key is released, the display returns to Mode II.

If the chosen parameter represents a number value, the flashing digit can be changed by means of the [+] and [-] keys. Position the cursor by using the [<] and [>] keys, then change the data value using the [+] and [-] keys.

REF% CURR.A POW.kW

50.0 Hz

SETUP

1

AUTO REMOTE RUN

Display Mode IV:
This display mode is available when local reference is selected. In this display mode, the speed reference is increased or decreased via +/- keys.
The first line shows the present speed reference. The second line shows the present drive output frequency. The third line show a bar graph of the relative value of the present drive output frequency in relation to the maximum frequency.

FREQUENCY

24.2 Hz

SETUP

1

205 MAX. REFERENCE
000060.000 Hz

The selected digit is indicated by a flashing cursor. The bottom display line gives the data value that will be entered (saved) by pressing the
OK button. Use CANCEL to ignore the change.

Changing Functional Values
If the selected parameter is a functional value, the selected text value can be changed by means of the [+] and [-] keys.

MOTOR CURRENT
USE +/-

56Hz

40.0 Hz

SETUP

1

0
-----60
HAND LOCAL RAMPING
Changing Data
Regardless of whether a parameter has been selected under the Quick
Menu or the Extend Menu, the procedure for changing data is the same. Pressing the CHANGE DATA key gives access to changing the selected parameter. Line 3 displays the parameter number and title.
The underlined function or number flashing in line 4 on the display is subject to change.
The procedure for changing data depends on whether the selected parameter represents a numerical data value or a function.

3.90 A

SETUP

1

210 REFERENCE TYPE
SUM

The functional value flashes until signing off by pressing the OK button.
The functional value has then been selected. Use CANCEL to ignore the change.

Changing Numeric Values in a List
A few parameters offer numeric lists of values that can be selected from or changed. This means that if the numeric value is not listed, a value may be entered using the procedure for changing numeric values. This applies to parameter 102, Motor power, parameter 103, Motor voltage, and parameter 104, Motor frequency.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

27

Quick Menu
The Quick Menu gives access to the 12 most important setup parameters of the drive. After programming the Quick Menu items, the drive will, in many cases, be ready for operation. The Quick Menu
Quick Menu
Item Number
1
2

Parameter
Name
001 Language
102 Motor Power

3
4

103 Motor Voltage
104 Motor Frequency

5

105 Motor Current

6

106 Motor Nominal Speed

7
8
9

201 Minimum Frequency
202 Maximum Frequency
206 Ramp Up Time

10

207 Ramp Down Time

11
12

323 Relay 1 Function
326 Relay 2 Function

parameters are described in the table below. A detailed description of the functions are given in the Programming section of this manual. The
Quick Menu is activated by pressing the QUICK MENU key on the control panel.
Description

Selects language used for all displays.
Sets output characteristics of drive based on kW (HP) of motor. See chart in parameter 102, Motor Power, to convert HP to kW.
Sets output characteristics of drive based on voltage of motor.
Sets output characteristics of drive based on nominal frequency of motor. This is typically equal to line frequency.
Sets output characteristics of drive based on full load current in amps
(FLA) of motor. This sets overload protection for motor.
Sets output characteristics of drive based on nominal full load speed of motor. Sets minimum controlled frequency at which motor will run.
Sets maximum controlled frequency at which motor will run.
Sets time to accelerate motor from 0 Hz to nominal motor frequency set in Quick Menu Item 4.
Sets time to decelerate motor from nominal motor frequency set in
Quick Menu Item 4 to 0 Hz.
Sets function of high voltage Form C relay.
Sets function of low voltage Form A relay.

To Enter or Change Quick Menu Parameter Data
Enter or change parameter data or settings in accordance with the following procedure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

Press Quick Menu key.
Use J and K keys to find parameter group to edit.
Use ‘+’ and ‘-’ keys to find parameter you chose to edit.
Press Change Data key.
Use ‘+’ and ‘-’ keys to select correct parameter setting. Or, to move to digits within a number, use J and K arrows. Flashing cursor indicates digit selected to change.
Press Cancel key to disregard change, or press OK key to accept change and enter new setting.

Example of Changing Parameter Data
Assume Parameter 206, Ramp Up Time, is set at 60 seconds. Change the ramp up time to 100 seconds in accordance with the following procedure. 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

28

Press Quick Menu key.
Press ‘+’ key until you reach Parameter 206, Ramp Up Time.
Press Change Data key.
Press J key twice – hundreds digit will flash.
Press ‘+’ key once to change hundreds digit from ‘0’ to ‘1.’
Press K key to move cursor to tens digit.
Press ‘-’ key until ‘6’ counts down to ‘0’ and setting for Ramp Up
Time reads ‘100 s.’
Press OK key to enter new value into drive controller.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

NOTE
Programming additional parameter functions available through Extended Menu key is done in accordance with same procedure as described for Quick Menu functions.

Extended Menu

Uploading Parameters

In some applications, the Quick Menu will not access all additional parameters necessary to set up the drive. To access all parameters, including Quick Menu items, use the Extended Menu. The Extended
Menu is enabled by pressing the EXTEND. MENU key. The
Programming section of this manual describes in detail all the parameters available through the Extended Menu.

At any time the present parameters may be copied to the local control panel (LCP). This may be useful when setting up multiple drives. It is also useful when it is desired to return to a previous set of parameters.
See parameter 004, LCP Copy, for more information.

Manual Initialization of Parameters

Manually initializing the drive using either the procedure described above or parameter 620, Operating Mode, does not change the values uploaded to the local control panel.

! CAUTION
Manual initialization using either procedure below, or parameter 620, will reset drive to standard default parameters. Any special application programming performed at factory, during start-up or thereafter, will be lost. As a backup, settings uploaded for storage in drive’s local control panel (LCP) keypad can be downloaded to drive using parameter download functions of parameter
004, LCP Copy.
It is possible to reset parameters back to their original default values at once. To reset the drive parameters to their read only default values, first remove power from the drive. Then press and hold the DISPLAY
MODE, the CHANGE DATA and the OK keys down simultaneously while reapplying power. Continue to hold down the three keys. Shortly after power is reapplied, the bottom line of the display will read
“Initialized.” After the display stops changing, release the keys. If
“Initialized” did not appear, repeat the procedure.
These parameters are not reset by manual initialization:
Parameter 600
Operating hours
Parameter 601
Hours run
Parameter 602 kWh counter
Parameter 603
Number of power-ups
Parameter 604
Number of overtemperatures
Parameter 605
Number of overvoltages
Initialization can also be done using Parameter 620.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

29

VLT 6000 Start-Up
Pre-installation Checks
1. Compare drive model number to what was ordered.
2. Ensure each of following are rated for same voltage:
• Drive
• Power line
• Motor
3. Record following motor data:
• Voltage
• Frequency
• Full load current
• Full load speed
• Power — convert HP to kW (See conversion table in parameter
102, Motor Power, in this manual.)
4. Ensure that rated drive current is equal to or greater than total full load current.
• For multiple motor operations, add up full load current ratings of all motors.
• Drive can be at most one size smaller than motor.
• If drive rating is less than motor, full motor output cannot be achieved.
5. Check motor wiring:
• Any disconnect between drive and motor should be interlocked to drive safety interlock circuit to avoid unwanted drive trips.
• No power factor correction capacitors can be connected between drive and motor.
• Two speed motors must be wired permanently for full speed.
• Y-start, H-run motors must be wired permanently for run.

Installation Checks
1. Input fusing in power supply for all drives must be provided (see
Input Fuses section in this manual).
2. Environmental concerns — for standard NEMA 1 drive:
• Clean air supply
• Dry air (max 95% relative humidity, non-condensing)
• 14oF to 104oF ambient temperature operating range, or as rated
• 3,300 foot maximum elevation with no derating
3. Mounting
• Vertical
• Drives with heat sink fins exposed in back of unit must be mounted against a solid surface (see Clearances section in this manual). • Keep any construction dirt out of drive.
4. Wiring
• Wire drive in accordance with instructions and diagrams received with drive.
• Separate conduits must be provided to drive for input power, output power, and control wiring.
• Note that safety interlock and remote run/stop circuitry is 115 VAC for drives with bypasses.
• Use knockouts or conduit entry plates. Avoid metal shavings in cabinet.
30

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

• Protect signal wires from noise.
• Ground each drive individually.
• Double check input and output power wiring for correct location.
Setting Up Drive for Motor Start
Enter motor nameplate data into drive through Quick Menu.
1. Parameter 101:
• If one motor is connected to drive, set to AEO FUNCTION.
• If more than one motor connected to drive, set to MULTIPLE
MOTORS. (Parameter 108, MULTIPLE MOTOR STARTING
VOLTAGE should be adjusted later to provide reliable starts and minimum starting current.)
2. Parameter 102, MOTOR POWER (in kW) (See conversion table in parameter 102, Motor Power, in this manual.)
3. Parameter 103, MOTOR VOLTAGE
4. Parameter 104, MOTOR FREQUENCY
5. Parameter 105, MOTOR CURRENT
6. Parameter 106, MOTOR SPEED
7. Parameter 107, (optional) select AUTOMATIC MOTOR ADAPTATION and run AMA in accordance with procedure in parameter
107, Automatic Motor Adaptation, in this manual.
8. Press HAND START key to initiate operation in local control.

Operational Tests — HAND
1. Check motor rotation from drive. If incorrect, disconnect input power from drive and reverse two leads between drive and motor.
2. If a bypass is provided, check motor rotation in bypass mode. If incorrect, disconnect input power from drive and reverse two input power leads.
3. Accelerate motor quickly to full speed and verify operation.
4. Decelerate motor quickly to stop and verify operation.
5. Operate motor over entire speed range while closely checking for resonance. Operational Tests — AUTO
1. Ensure that drive follows run/stop and safety interlock commands from system.
2. Ensure drive follows speed reference, or feedback, from system.

Final Adjustments
1. Use parameters 216 through 220 to reject any resonant points.
2. Lock out keypad functions, as required.

General Troubleshooting
1. Display Messages:
• AUTO START—Drive has tripped off and is in process of automatically restarting.
• TRIP—Drive has tripped off. Press RESET to start.
• TRIP LOCKED—Drive has tripped off. Remove and apply power before restarting with RESET.
2. Refer to Warnings and Alarms section in this manual.
3. Check tightness of all connections and wires for proper location.
4. Measure input signals.
5. Check drive input and output for balanced voltage and current.

Programming
Using the Extend Menu key, it is possible to access to all the parameters for the drive.

Description of Parameters
Parameters are grouped by function. The groups are:
Operation and Display
Parameters 001 through 017
Load and Motor
Parameters 100 through 117
References and Limits
Parameters 200 through 228
Input and Outputs
Parameters 300 through 328
Application Functions
Parameters 400 through 427
Serial Communication
Parameters 500 through 566
Service Functions
Parameters 600 through 631
Relay Card Functions
Parameters 700 through 711
The numbers shown in the square brackets ([ ]) after the parameter values are used in serial communications to choose the parameter value from the list. They are not shown on the local control panel when programming the drive locally.

Setup Configuration and Parameters Copy
The VLT 6000 has four independent parameter setups that can be programmed. Each setup acts independently in controlling the drive.
Example applications would be programming different setups for day/night or summer/winter operation. Any of the four setups can be used. The setup is selected in parameter 002, Active Setup, for programming and operation. Setups are changed manually by switching between active setups in parameter 002. It is also possible to change setups through digital inputs or serial communication by selecting Multi-setup in parameter 002 and providing an external signal.
The number of the active setup selected is shown on the keypad display under Setup in the second line of the display.
A short cut to programming more than one setup is possible by using parameter 003, Setup Copy. This enables copying one setup to another setup. After copying parameter settings from one setup, just those parameters unique to the other setups need be changed.
All setups can be transferred from one VLT drive to another by using the VLT's removable keypad. Parameter 004, LCP Copy, allows this function. First, upload all parameter values to the keypad. The keypad can then be removed and plugged into another VLT drive where all parameter values can be downloaded. If motor or drive sizes differ,
Download Power-independent Parameters can be selected in parameter 004 to omit downloading motor and current dependent data.

Operation and Display
Parameters 000 through 017
This parameter group deals with the display, control keys and other general functions.
001 Language
Value:
✭ English (ENGLISH)
German (DEUTSCH)
French (FRANCAIS)
Danish (DANSK)
Spanish (ESPAÑOL)
Italian (ITALIANO)
Swedish (SVENSKA)
Dutch (NEDERLANDS)
Portuguese (PORTUGUESA)
Finnish (SUOMI)

(Language)
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]

Function:
This parameter determines the language to be used on the display.
Description of choice:
Select the display language.
002 Active Setup
Value:
Factory Setup (FACTORY SETUP)
✭ Setup 1 (SETUP 1)
Setup 2 (SETUP 2)
Setup 3 (SETUP 3)
Setup 4 (SETUP 4)
Multi-setup (MULTI SETUP)

(ACTIVE SETUP)
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]

Function:
This parameter defines the setup number that controls the drive.
All parameters can be programmed in four individual parameter setups,
Setup 1, Setup 2, Setup 3 and Setup 4.
There is also a pre-programmed, read-only setup, called Factory
Setup.
Description of choice:
The Factory Setup contains the parameter values preset at the factory.
This data can be used as a default setup to reset parameters to a known state.
Setups 1 through 4 are four individual setups that can be selected as required. Multi-setup is used if remote switching between different setups is required. Terminals 16, 17, 29, 32, 33 and the serial communication port can be used for switching between setups.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

31

Setup Change Connection Example

004 LCP Copy
Value:
✭ No copying (NO COPY)
Upload all parameters
(UPLOAD ALL PARAMET.)
Download all parameters
(DOWNLOAD ALL PARAM.)
Download power-independent parameters
(DOWNLOAD SIZE INDEP.)

(LCP COPY)
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]

Function:
Parameter 004, LCP Copy, is used to copy all parameter setups to or from the Local Control Panel (LCP). This can be used to store a backup copy of all parameters in the LCP or to copy all setups from one drive to another.
Selection of setup using terminals 32 and 33.
See the descriptions of parameters 300 through 307.
Parameter 306 = Selection of Setup, lsb
Parameter 307 = Selection of Setup, msb
Parameter 002 = Multi Setup
003 Copying of Setups
Value:
✭ No copying (NO COPY)
Copy active Setup to Setup 1
(COPY TO SETUP 1)
Copy active Setup to Setup 2
(COPY TO SETUP 2)
Copy active Setup to Setup 3
(COPY TO SETUP 3)
Copy active Setup to Setup 4
(COPY TO SETUP 4)
Copy active Setup to all (COPY TO ALL)

Description of choice:
Select Upload All Parameters if all parameter values are to be copied from the drive to the LCP.

(Setup Copy)
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]

Function:
A copy is made from the active setup selected in parameter 002, Active
Setup, to the setup or setups selected in parameter 003, Copying of
Setups.
NOTE
Copying is only possible when drive is stopped.
Description of choice:
The copying starts when the required copying function has been selected and the OK key has been pressed.

Select Download All Parameters if all parameter values are to be copied from the LCP to the drive on which the control panel has been mounted. Select Download Power-independent Parameters if only the powerindependent parameters are to be downloaded. This allows the parameters from one drive to be easily copied to another drive of a different size. Settings in parameters 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 215,
221, and 222 are not downloaded using this function.
NOTE
Copying is only possible when drive is stopped.

Setup of User-defined Readout
Parameter 005, Maximum Value of User-defined Readout, and
Parameter 006, Unit for User-defined Readout, allow users to design their own readout which can be seen if the User-defined Readout has been selected as one of the displayed meters. The range is set in parameter 005, Maximum Value of User-defined Readout and the unit is determined in parameter 006, Unit for User-defined Readout. The choice of unit determines whether the relationship between the output frequency and the readout is a linear, square or cubed. Units representing rates (RPM, CFM, GPM, etc.) are linear. Units representing pressure (PSI, in. wg., etc.) are square. Units representing power
(HP, kW, etc.) are cubed.

The display indicates when copying is in progress.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
32

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

005

Maximum Value of User-Defined Readout
(CUSTOM READOUT )

Value:
0.01 - 999,999.99

✭100.000

Function:
This parameter determines the value that the user defined meter will display when the drive’s output frequency is the value set in parameter
202, Output Frequency High.
Description of choice:
Set the required value for maximum output frequency.
006

Unit for User Defined Readout
(CUST. READ. UNIT)

Value:


No unit 1
%1
rpm 1 ppm 1 pulse/s 1 l/s 1 l/min 1 l/h 1 kg/s 1 kg/min 1 kg/h 1 m3/s 1 m3/min 1 m3/h 1 m/s 1 mbar 2 bar 2
Pa 2
MPa 2
MWG 2 kW 3

[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]

GPM 1 gal/s 1 gal/min 1 gal/h 1 lb/s 1 lb/min 1 lb/h 1
CFM 1 ft3/s 1 ft3/min 1 ft3/h 1 ft3/min 1 ft/s 1 in wg 2 ft wg 2
PSI 2 lb/in 2
HP 3

[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[36]
[37]
[38]

1

Linear units (flow or speed)
Squared units (pressure)
3
Cubed units (power)
2

Function:
Select a unit to be shown with the display of the User-defined Readout.
If flow or speed units are selected, the relationship between readout and output frequency will be a linear one. If pressure units are selected, the ratio will be square. If power units are selected, the ratio will be cubed.
The value and the unit are shown in display mode whenever User
Defined Readout has been selected in one of parameters 007 through
010, Display Readout.

007 Large Display Readout (LARGE READOUT)
Value:
Resulting reference [%] (REFERENCE [%])
[1]
Resulting reference [unit] (REFERENCE [UNIT])
[2]
Frequency [Hz] (FREQUENCY [HZ])
[3]
✭ % of maximum output frequency [%]
(FREQUENCY [%])
[4]
Motor current [A] (MOTOR CURRENT [A])
[5]
Power [kW] (POWER [KW])
[6]
Power [HP] (POWER [HP])
[7]
Output energy [kWh] (ENERGY [KWH])
[8]
Hours run [Hours] (HOURS RUN [h])
[9]
User-defined readout [unit]
(CUSTOM READ [UNITS])
[10]
Setpoint 1 [unit] (SETPOINT 1 [UNITS])
[11]
Setpoint 2 [unit] (SETPOINT 2 [UNITS])
[12]
Feedback 1 (FEEDBACK 1 [UNITS])
[13]
Feedback 2 (FEEDBACK 2 [UNITS])
[14]
Feedback [unit] (FEEDBACK [UNITS])
[15]
Motor voltage [V] (MOTOR VOLTAGE [V])
[16]
DC link voltage [V] (DC VOLTAGE [V])
[17]
Thermal load, motor [%]
(THERM.MOTOR LOAD [%])
[18]
Thermal load, VLT [%] (THERM.DRIVE LOAD [%]) [19]
Digital input [Binary code] (DIGITAL INPUT [BIN])
[20]
Analog input 53 [V] (ANALOG INPUT 53 [V])
[21]
Analog input 54 [V] (ANALOG INPUT 54 [V])
[22]
Analog input 60 [mA] (ANALOG 60 [mA])
[23]
Relay status [Binary code] (RELAY STATUS [BIN]) [24]
Pulse reference [Hz] (PULSE REFERENCE [Hz])
[25]
External reference [%] (EXT. REFERENCE [%])
[26]
Heat sink temp. [oC] (HEATSINK TEMP [oC])
[27]
Profibus fault [HEX] (COMM.OPTION WARN [HEX]) [28]
LCD display text [text] (FREE PROG. ARRAY)
[29]

Description of choice:
Select the required unit for User-defined Readout.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

33

Function:
This parameter allows a choice of the data value to be shown in the large display when power is applied to the drive. In Display ModeI, the
+ and - keys change this display when the drive is in operation.
Description of choice:
No readout can only be selected in parameters 008 through 010, Small
Display Readout, but not in parameter 007, Large Display Readout.
Resulting reference [%] gives the total of all references as a percentage of parameter 205, Maximum Reference.

Thermal load, motor [%] is the calculated thermal load of the motor.
100% is the cutout limit. See also parameter 117, Motor Thermal
Protection.
Thermal load, VLT [%] is the calculated thermal load of the drive.
100% is the trip point.
Digital input [binary code] is the signal status from the 8 digital inputs (16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and 33). Terminal 16 corresponds to the bit at the far left. (0 = no signal, 1 = connected signal.)
Analog input 53 [V] is the voltage applied to terminal 53.

Reference [unit] gives the total of all references. This is displayed in
Hz in open loop. In closed loop, the reference unit is selected in parameter 415, Process Units.
Frequency [Hz] gives the output frequency of the drive.
% of maximum output frequency [%] is the output frequency as a percentage of parameter 202, Output Frequency High Limit.
Motor current [A] is the average phase current of the motor.

Analog input 54 [V] is the voltage applied to terminal 54.
Analog input 60 [mA] is the current applied to terminal 60.
Relay status [binary code] displays the open or closed position of relays 1 through 6 in binary code. Open is 0 and closed 1, read left to right (positions 7 and 8, displayed in parameter 007, are not used.)
Pulse reference [Hz] is the pulse frequency in Hz applied to terminal
17 or terminal 29.

Power [kW] is the actual power, in kW, delivered to the motor.
Power [HP] is the actual power, in HP, delivered to the motor.

External reference [%] is the sum of the external references as a percentage of parameter 205, Maximum Reference.

Output energy [kWh] is the energy delivered by the motor since the latest reset was made using parameter 618, Reset of kWh Counter.

Heat sink temp. [°C] is the present heat sink temperature of the drive.
The trip point is 90 ± 5°C for NEMA 1 units, 80 ± 5°C for NEMA 12.

Hours run [hours] is the number of hours that the motor has run since the latest reset was made using parameter 619, Reset of Hours
Run Counter.

Profibus fault [HEX] is enabled when the Profibus protocol option is installed and corresponds to the warnings in Profibus parameter 953.

User Defined readout [-] is a user defined value, calculated on the basis of the present output frequency, as well as the scaling in parameter 005, Maximum Value of User-Defined Readout, and the unit in parameter 006, Unit for User-Defined Readout.
Setpoint 1 [unit] is the setpoint value programmed in parameter 418,
Setpoint 1. The unit is selected in parameter 415, Process Units.
Setpoint 2 [unit] is the setpoint value programmed in parameter 419,
Setpoint 2. The unit is selected in parameter 415, Process Units.
Feedback 1 [unit] is the value of the feedback signal applied to
Terminal 53. The unit is selected in parameter 415, Process Units.
Feedback 2 [unit] is the value of the feedback signal applied to
Terminal 54. The unit is selected in parameter 415, Process Units.
Feedback [unit] is the total feedback signal using the unit scaling selected in parameter 413, Minimum Feedback; parameter 414
Maximum Feedback; parameter 415, Process Units; and parameter
417, 2 Feedback Calc.
Motor voltage [V] is the voltage supplied to the motor.
DC link voltage [V] is the drive DC bus voltage.

LCD display text [text] displays the text programmed in parameter
533, Display Text 1, and 534, Display Text 2, through the serial communications port..
008

Small Display Readout 1.1
(SMALL READOUT 1)

Value:
See parameter 007, Large Display Readout
✭ Reference, %
Function:
This parameter selects the meter to be displayed on the left display on line 1. Showing three different meters on line 1 is recommended when setting up the PID. This allows tracking how the process reacts to a change of reference.
Description of choice:
There is a choice of 26 different meters. See parameter 007, Large
Display Readout.
009

Small Display Readout 1.2
(SMALL READOUT 2)

Value:
See parameter 007, Large Display Readout
5 Motor current [A]

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
34

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Function:
See the functional description for parameter 008, Small Display
Readout.
Description of choice:
There is a choice of 26 meters, see parameter 007 Large Display
Readout.
010

Small Display Readout 1.3
(SMALL READOUT 3)

Value:
See parameter 007 Large Display Readout
5 Power [HP]

014 Auto Start on LCP
Value
Disable (DISABLE)
5 Enable (ENABLE)

(AUTO START BTTN)
[0]
[1]

Function:
This parameter allows disabling the Auto/Start key on the keypad.

Function:
See the functional description for parameter 008 Small Data Readout.
Description of choice:
There is a choice of 26 different data values, see parameter 007 Large
Display Readout.
011 Unit of Local Reference (UNIT OF LOC REF)
Value:
Hz (HZ)
[0]
5 % of output frequency range (%) (% OF FMAX)
[1]
Function:
This parameter sets the unit that will be displayed in Display Mode IV when the drive’s speed is being controlled locally.

Description of choice:
If Disable is selected in this parameter, the Auto/Start key will be disabled. P
015 Reset on LCP
Value:
Disable (DISABLE)
5 Enable (ENABLE)

015
(RESET BUTTON)
[0]
[1]

Function:
This parameter allows disabling the Reset key on the keypad.
Description of choice:
If Disable is selected in this parameter, the Reset key will be inactive.

! CAUTION

Description of choice:
Choose the desired unit for local reference.
012 Hand Start on LCP (HAND START BUTTON)
Value:
Disable (DISABLE)
[0]
5 Enable (ENABLE)
[1]
Function:
This parameter allows disabling the Hand/Start key on the keypad.
Description of choice:
If Disable is selected in this parameter, the Hand/Start key will be disabled. 013 OFF/STOP on LCP (STOP BUTTON)
Value:
Disable (DISABLE)
5 Enable (ENABLE)

! CAUTION
If Disable is selected, motor cannot be stopped by Off/Stop key.

[0]
[1]

Function:
This parameter allows disabling the Off/Stop key on the keypad.
Description of choice:
If Disable is selected in this parameter, the Off/Stop key will be disabled.

Do not disable Reset unless a remote reset is available through digital inputs and parameters
300 through 307.

016 Lock for Data Change (DATA CHANGE LOCK)
Value:
5 Not Locked (NOT LOCKED)
[0]
Locked (LOCKED)
[1]
Function:
This parameter allows locking out parameter changes at the local control panel.
Description of choice:
If Locked is selected, data modifications in the parameters cannot be made. Parameter changes will be possible through serial communication.
Parameters 007 through 010, Display Readout can be changed at the local control panel.
The local control panel can also be locked or unlocked by a digital input controlled by parameters 300 through 307.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

35

017

Operating State at Power Up
(POWER UP ACTION)

Value:
5 Auto restart (AUTO RESTART)
OFF/STOP (OFF/STOP)

[0]
[1]

Function:
Selects auto or manual restart when power is reapplied after an outage occurs to a running drive.
Description of choice:
Auto restart is selected if the drive is to resume operation after a power outage. OFF/STOP is selected if the drive is to remain stopped after a power outage. To restart, press the Hand/Start or Auto/Start key at the keypad. ! CAUTION
If HAND/START or AUTO/START are disabled by parameters 012 and 014, motor will not be able to restart if OFF/STOP is selected.

Load and Motor
Parameters 100 through 117
This parameter group controls output power and other output characteristics of the drive.
For correct operation, motor nameplate data must be entered into parameters 102 through 106 either through the Quick Menu or the
Extended Menu. In addition, automatic motor adaptation, DC braking and motor thermal protection can be set by this parameter group.
100 Configuration
Value:
5 Open loop (OPEN LOOP)
Closed loop (CLOSED LOOP)

NOTE
It is important to set parameter 100,
Configuration, properly when closed loop operation is required. When open loop is selected, parameters associated with setting up
PID controller are not accessible.
Characteristics
101 Torque Characteristics
( VT CHARACT)
Value:
5 Automatic Energy Optimization
(AEO FUNCTION)
[0]
Parallel motors (MULTIPLE MOTORS)
[1]
Function:
This parameter configures the drive for single or multiple motor operation. Description of choice:
Select Automatic Energy Optimization (AEO) for all single motor applications. When AEO has been selected, only one motor may be connected to the drive at a time.
The AEO function will automatically and continuously monitor the load and adjust the output voltage to maximize motor and drive efficiency and performance. After the motor reaches the set speed, the AEO function reduces the output voltage to the motor, if the load will allow.
When the load is light, the voltage is reduced, as shown in the graph below. This lower voltage reduces motor heating and motor noise, and increases efficiency.
Select Parallel motors when more than one motor is connected in parallel to the output. In this case, it is necessary to set a start voltage in parameter 108, Start Voltage of Parallel Motors.

(CONFIG. MODE)
[0]
[1]

Function:
This parameter is used for selecting closed loop or open loop operation. Description of choice:
If Open loop is selected, speed control is changed directly by the speed reference signal. Any feedback signal applied to the drive will have no effect on the drive’s speed.
If Closed loop is selected, the internal process regulator is available to accept feedback signal(s) to provide the desired speed regulation.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
36

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

! CAUTION
It is very important that values set in parameters 102, Motor Power, through 106, Rated Motor
Speed, correspond accurately to nameplate data of motor.
102 Motor Power
Value:
0.25 kW (0.33 HP)
0.37 kW (0.5 HP)
0.55 kW (0.75 HP)
0.75 kW (1 HP)
1.1 kW
(1.5 HP)
1.5 kW
(2 HP)
2.2 kW
(3 HP)
3 kW
-4 kW
(5 HP)
5.5 kW
(7.5 HP)
7.5 kW
(10 HP)
11 kW
(15 HP)
15 kW
(20 HP)
18.5 kW (25 HP)
22 kW
(30 HP)
30 kW
(40 HP)
37 kW
(50 HP)
45 kW
(60 HP)
55 kW
(75 HP)
75 kW
(100 HP)
90 kW
(125 HP)
110 kW
(150 HP)
132 kW
(175 HP)
160 kW (200 HP)
200 kW (300 HP)
250 kW -300 kW -315 kW (350 HP)
355 kW (450 HP)
400 kW (500 HP)
450 kW (600 HP)
5 Depends on the unit

(MOTOR POWER)
[25]
[37]
[55]
[75]
[110]
[150]
[220]
[300]
[400]
[550]
[750]
[1100]
[1500]
[1850]
[2200]
[3000]
[3700]
[4500]
[5500]
[7500]
[9000]
[11000]
[13200]
[16000]
[20000]
[25000]
[30000]
[31500]
[35500]
[40000]
[50000]

Function:
Set the power value that corresponds to the nameplate power of the motor. The default setting is the full rating of the drive.
Description of choice:
Select a value that equals the nameplate data on the motor. It is also possible to set any power within the range of the drive.

103 Motor Voltage
Value:
200 V
208 V
220 V
230 V
240 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
440 V
460 V
480 V
500 V
575 V
5 Depends on the unit
Function:
Set the rated motor voltage.

(MOTOR VOLTAGE)
[200]
[208]
[220]
[230]
[240]
[380]
[400]
[415]
[440]
[460]
[480]
[500]
[575]

Description of choice:
Select a value that equals the nameplate data on the motor. This may be less than the input voltage. It is also possible to set any voltage within the range of the drive.
104 Motor Frequency
(MOTOR FREQUENCY)
Value:
50 Hz (50 Hz)
[50]
5 60 Hz (60 Hz)
[60]
Function:
This is where the rated motor frequency is selected. This is usually the frequency of the power line.
Description of choice:
Select the desired value. It is also possible to set any frequency within the range of the drive.

! CAUTION
Enter correct value in parameter 105, Motor Current, since this forms part of VVC+ control.
Changing values in parameter 102, Motor Power, or parameter 103, Motor Voltage, after motor current has been entered in parameter 105, may automatically change the value in parameter 105.
105 Motor Current
Value:
0.01 to drive rating

(MOTOR CURRENT)
5 Set based on motor nameplate.

Function:
The rated motor current in amps is used for setting output current and providing motor thermal protection. It is important to set the motor current to the full load current rating (FLA) of the motor.
Description of choice:
Set a value that equals the nameplate data on the motor.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

37

NOTE
Some motors (such as motors with 6 or more poles) may be unable to run Automatic
Adaptation. Limited AMA is a procedure which can be effective in such cases since results measure motor’s stator and effects of cable length. Multiple motor applications cannot use
AMA.

! CAUTION
Enter correct value in parameter 106, Rated
Motor Speed, since this forms part of VVC+ control feature. Changing value in parameter
104, Motor Frequency, after rated motor speed has been entered in parameter 106, may automatically change the value in parameter 106.
106 Rated Motor Speed
Value:

(MOTOR NOM. SPEED)

-

100 through 60000

✭ Depends on parameter 102, Motor Power
Function:
This is where the value is set that corresponds to the rated motor speed shown on the motor nameplate.
Description of choice:
Choose a value that corresponds to the motor nameplate data.
107

Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA
(AUTO MOTOR ADAPT)

Value:
5 Optimization disable (NO AMA)
Automatic adaptation (RUN AMA)
Limited AMA (RUN LIMITED AMA)

The following must be noted when either AMA function is used:

[0]
[1]
[2]

Function:
Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) is an advanced procedure that measures electrical characteristics of the motor. This procedure does not cause the motor to run.
AMA optimizes the adjustment of the drive to the motor. This feature is particularly useful when the drive-to-motor cable length is long, and with nonstandard motors or high HP motors. Although it is not necessary to run AMA, it is highly recommended for optimum operation and increases the capability of the Automatic Energy Optimization function selectable in parameter 101, Torque Characteristics.
For the best adjustment of the drive, it is recommended to carry out
AMA on a cold motor.

! CAUTION
Repeated AMA operation may lead to a heating of motor that will result in an increase of stator resistance. This will reduce accuracy. Allow motor to cool before running AMA.
If an output LC-filter has been connected between the drive and the motor, select Limited AMA. If the complete AMA procedure is desired, remove the LC-filter, run Automatic Adaptation (RUN AMA), and reinstall the filter.

-

Before running AMA, the correct nameplate data for the motor must be entered in parameters 102 through 106.
Total automatic motor adaptation may take up to 10 minutes.
Alarms and warnings will be shown in the display if faults occur during motor adaptation.
AMA can only be carried out if the rated motor current of the motor is at least 35% of the rated output current of the drive.

Description of choice:
Select Automatic Adaptation if the drive is to carry out a complete automatic motor adaptation procedure.
Select Limited AMA if an LC-filter has been placed between the drive and the motor, for a motor with 6 or more poles, or if Automatic
Adaptation was unsuccessful. Some drives may display Automatic
Adaptation with LC-filter rather than Limited AMA. The functions are the same.

Procedure for Automatic Motor Adaptation:
1.

Set motor parameters 102 through 106 according to motor nameplate data.
2. Connect 24 VDC from terminal 12, or from external source, to terminal 27.
3. Select either Automatic Adaptation or Limited AMA in parameter
107, Automatic Motor Adaptation.
4. Start drive by pressing Hand Start or connect terminal 18 (start) to terminal 12 and press Auto Start.
To stop automatic adaptation or limited AMA prior to completion:
Press OFF/STOP key.
After a normal sequence is complete, the display reads: AMA STOP
Press RESET key. Drive is now ready for operation.
NOTE
RESET key must be pressed after AMA is completed to save results to drive.
If there is a fault, the display reads: ALARM 22
1. Check alarms section in this manual for possible causes of alarm.
2. Press RESET key to clear fault.
If there is a warning, the display reads: WARNING (39 through 42)
1. Check warnings section in this manual for possible causes of warning. 2. Press CHANGE DATA key and select Continue if AMA is to continue despite warning, or press OFF/STOP key to stop AMA.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
38

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

108

Start Voltage of Parallel Motors
(MULTIM.START VOLT)

Value:
0.0 through parameter 103 Motor Voltage
✭ depends on par. 103 Motor Voltage
Function:
This parameter sets the voltage at 0 Hz for all drives with two or more motors connected in parallel.
The start voltage represents a supplementary voltage input to the motor. Increasing the start voltage will increase the starting torque. A start voltage is especially useful for small motors (<5 HP) as they have a higher stator resistance than larger motors.
This function is only active if Parallel Motors has been selected in parameter 101, Torque Characteristics.
Description of choice:
To set the start voltage, monitor the motor current while starting the load and choose the starting voltage that gives the lowest starting current.
Start with a small value and increase only as required for reliable starting. 109 Resonance Dampening (RESONANCE DAMP.)
Value:
0 to 500 %
5100 %
Function:
High-frequency resonances in the motor can be eliminated by adjusting this parameter.

111 Start Delay
Value:
0.0 to 120.0 sec.

(START DELAY)
5 0.0 sec.

Function:
This parameter allows a delayed start of the drive after the conditions for start have been fulfilled. After the start delay time has elapsed, the drive will start and ramp up to the commanded speed.
Description of choice:
Set the desired time before the drive will start.
112 Motor Preheat
Value:
✭ Disable (DISABLE)
Enable (ENABLE)

(MOTOR PREHEAT)
[0]
[1]

Function:
The motor preheat function protects the motor from condensation by running a small DC current through the motor. Motor preheat is only active during stop when control voltage is applied to terminal 27.
Description of choice:
Select Disable if this function is not required. Select Enable to activate motor preheating. The amount of motor preheating is set in parameter 113.

! WARNING
Be sure to check parameter 113 if parameter
112, Motor Preheat, is enabled. Excessive current or preheating time may damage motor. Do not apply any more current than required.

Description of choice:
Adjust the dampening percentage for smoothest high speed operation.
113
110 High Breakaway Torque (HIGH START TORQ.)
Value:
0.0 to 0.5 sec.
5 OFF
Function:
The drive is able to breakaway high friction loads. This high starting torque, approximately 1.6 x rated torque is available for up to 0.5 seconds. The current level is limited by the protective circuits of the drive. OFF corresponds to 0.0 sec.
Description of choice:
Set the time for which high starting torque is desired.

Motor Preheat DC Current
(PREHEAT DC-CURR.)

Value:
0 to 100 %
The maximum value depends on the rated motor current.

5 50 %

Function:
The motor can be preheated when stopped by applying DC current to it. A holding torque can also be provided.
Description of choice:
The motor can be preheated by means of a DC current. At 0%, the function is inactive; at a value higher than 0%, a DC current will be supplied to the motor whenever it is stopped. A windmilling fan can be held by providing a holding toque by using this parameter.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

39

DC Braking
Applying DC current to the motor will brake the motor. Parameter 114,
DC Braking Current, sets the DC braking current as a percentage of the rated motor current. Parameter 115, DC Braking Time, sets the amount of time that the DC current will be applied. Parameter 116, DC
Brake Cut-in Frequency, sets the frequency at which DC braking begins when the motor decelerates during a stop.
If terminal 19 or 27 (parameters 303 or 304 Digital Input) has been programmed to DC Braking Inverse and shifts from logic ‘1’ to logic ‘0’, the DC braking will be activated immediately.
When the start signal on terminal 18 changes from logic ‘1’ to logic ‘0’, the DC braking will be activated when the output frequency becomes lower than the brake cut-in frequency.
If a DC brake current is set in parameter 114, the drive’s switching frequency will be limited to 4 kHz during the braking.

! WARNING
A high braking current supplied for a long time will overheat motor. Use only the DC braking current and time required.

! CAUTION
Do not use DC braking function if inertia of driven load is more than 20 times inertia of motor. ! CAUTION
Most HVAC applications do not required braking or holding. It is suggested that parameter 114 remain set at 0 unless braking or holding torque is required.
115 DC Braking Time
Value:
0.0 to 60.0 sec.

(DC BRAKE TIME)
✭ 10.0 sec.

Function:
This parameter sets the time that the DC braking is active.
Description of choice:
Set the desired time.
116

DC Brake Cut-in Frequency
(DC BRAKE CUT-IN)

Value:
0.0 (OFF) to setting of parameter 202

Function:
This parameter is used for setting the frequency at which DC braking begins after a stop command is issued.
Description of choice:
Set the desired frequency for braking to begin upon deceleration.

114 DC Braking Current
(DC BRAKE CURRENT)
Value:
0 to 100%
5 50 %
The maximum value depends on the rated motor current.
Function:
This parameter is used for setting the DC braking current that is applied: 1.

When the DC brake frequency set in parameter 116 DC Brake
Cut-in Frequency has been reached during a stop.
2. When DC brake inverse is active via terminal 19 or 27, or via the serial bus.
The DC braking current will be active for the duration of the DC braking time set in parameter 115 DC Braking Time.

Description of choice:
To be set as a percentage value of the rated motor current set in parameter 105 Motor Current.
100% DC braking current corresponds to the value set in parameter
105.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
40

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

✭ OFF

117

Motor Thermal Protection
(MOT. THERM PROTEC)

Value:
No protection (NO PROTECTION)
[0]
Thermistor warning (THERMISTOR WARNING)
[1]
Thermistor trip (THERMISTOR FAULT)
[2]
ETR Warning 1 (ETR WARNING 1)
[3]
✭ ETR Trip 1 (ETR TRIP 1)
[4]
ETR Warning 2 (ETR WARNING 2)
[5]
ETR Trip 2 (ETR TRIP 2)
[6]
ETR Warning 3 (ETR WARNING 3)
[7]
ETR Trip 3 (ETR TRIP 3)
[8]
ETR Warning 4 (ETR WARNING 4)
[9]
ETR Trip 4 (ETR TRIP 4)
[10]
Function:
The drive is able to monitor the motor temperature in two different ways: By a thermistor installed in the motor. The thermistor is connected to one of the analog input terminals (53 or 54).
Calculation of the thermal load by the Electronic Thermal Relay
(ETR) is based on current, frequency and time. This is compared with the rated motor current and the rated motor frequency. The calculations take into account the reduced cooling of the motor at low speeds.

Description of choice:
Select No protection if no warning or trip is desired when the motor is overheated. Select Thermistor warning if a warning is desired when the motor thermistor reaches its trip point.
Select Thermistor trip if a fault is desired when the motor thermistor reaches its trip point.
Select ETR Warning 1 through 4, if a warning is desired when the motor is overheated according to the ETR calculations.
The drive can also be programmed to give off a warning signal through one of the digital outputs.
Select ETR Trip 1 through 4 if a fault is desired when the motor is overheated according to the ETR calculations.

Motor Thermal Protection
The motor temperature is calculated on the basis of motor current, output frequency and time. The graph shows the amount of time that the drive can provide a current level to the motor at the rated motor frequency, 20% of rated motor frequency and 200% of rated motor frequency. ETR Tip 1 through 4 and ETR Warning 1 through 4 correspond to the four drive setups. This enables the use of the ETR function to protect up to four different motors if a different setup is used for each different motor. ! CAUTION
If multiple setups are used, be sure to program complete motor data (parameters 102 through
106) and parameter 117 in each setup. This can be done manually, or parameter 003 can be used to copy all data from one setup into one or more setup groups.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

41

References and Limits
Parameters 200 through 228

202

In this parameter group, the frequencies and references of the drive are set.

Value:
Parameter 201 to parameter 200

This parameter group includes:
-

Setting of ramp times
Choice of four preset references
Setting four bypass frequencies
Setting maximum current to motor
Setting warning limits for current, frequency, reference and feedback 200

Output Frequency Range
(FREQUENCY RANGE)

Value:
5 0 to 120 Hz (0 - 120 HZ)
0 to 1000 Hz (0 - 1000 HZ)

[0]
[1]

Function:
Choose one of two maximum output frequency ranges.

Output Frequency High Limit
(MAX. FREQUENCY)
5 60 Hz

Function:
Set the highest speed at which the motor is to run.
NOTE
Output frequency of drive can never assume value higher than 1/10th of switching frequency.
See parameter 407, Switching Frequency.
Description of choice:
Set a value between the low frequency limit, set in parameter 201, and the frequency range limit, set in parameter 200. The drive will not be able to run continuously at an output frequency above this value in any mode. ! WARNING

Description of choice:
Select the output frequency range that includes the highest output frequency required for normal operation.

! WARNING

HVAC applications seldom require output frequency greater than 60 Hz. Check with Danfoss
Graham, manufacturer of motor, and manufacturer of driven equipment before selecting maximum frequency greater than 60 Hz.

HVAC applications seldom require output frequency greater than 120 Hz. Check with
Danfoss Graham, manufacturer of motor, or manufacturer of driven equipment before selecting 0 - 1000 Hz range.
201

Output Frequency Low Limit
(MIN. FREQUENCY)

Value:
0.0 to parameter 202

5 0.0 HZ

Function:
Set the minimum speed at which the motor is to run.
Description of choice:
A value from 0.0 Hz to the Output Frequency High Limit frequency set in parameter 202 can be selected. The drive will not be able to run continuously at an output frequency below this value in any mode.
NOTE
For fan applications, factory setting of parameter 201 is 6 Hz. For pump applications, factory setting for parameter 201 is 18 Hz.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
42

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Reference Handling
Reference handling is shown in the block diagram at the bottom of this page. The block diagram shows how a change in a parameter can effect the resulting reference.

It is possible to have both internal preset references and external references at the same time. In parameter 210, Reference Type, a choice is made of how the preset references are to be combined with the external references.

Parameters 203 to 205, Reference Handling, Minimum and Maximum
Reference, and parameter 210, Reference Type, define the way reference handling is carried out. These parameters are active both in closed loop and open loop operation.

An independent local reference exists, where the resulting reference is set by means of the + and - keys. In all cases, the output frequency range is limited by parameter 201, Output Frequency Low Limit, and parameter 202, Output Frequency High Limit.

In closed loop operation, the resulting reference is affected by parameters 418 and 419, Setpoint 1 and 2, as well as by remote references.
Remote references can be:
1) external references, including analog inputs 53, 54 and 60; pulse references through terminals 17 or 29 and references from serial communication 2) preset references
The resulting reference can be shown in the display as a percentage or as a selected unit of measure. The sum of the external references can be displayed in a percentage of the range between Minimum
Reference to Maximum Reference. Select External Reference, [%] or the desired unit in parameters 007 through 010, Display Readout, to display the reference value.

! CAUTION
If local reference is active, drive is always in
Open Loop, regardless of choice made in parameter 100, Configuration.

The unit of the local reference can be set either as Hz or as a percentage of the output frequency range. The unit is selected in parameter 011, Unit of Local Reference.
203 Reference Handling
(REFERENCE SITE)
Value:
5 Hand/Auto linked reference
(LINKED TO HAND/START)
[0]
Remote controlled reference (REMOTE)
[1]
Local reference (LOCAL)
[2]

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

43

Function:
This parameter chooses the active resulting reference. If Hand/Auto linked reference is selected, the resulting reference will depend on whether the drive is in Hand or Auto mode.
The table below shows which reference is active when Hand/Auto linked reference, Remote reference or Local reference has been selected. The Hand mode or Auto mode can be selected via the keypad or by a digital input set in parameters 300 through 307 Digital
Inputs.
Reference Handling
Hand/Auto
Remote
Local

Hand Mode
Local ref. active
Remote ref. active
Local ref. active

Auto Mode
Remote ref. active
Remote ref. active
Local ref. active

Description of choice:
If Hand/Auto linked reference is chosen, the motor speed in Hand mode will be set by the local reference, while in Auto mode it is set by the remote references and any setpoints selected.
If Remote reference is selected, the motor speed will depend on remote references and any setpoints selected, regardless of whether
Hand mode or Auto mode has been chosen.
If Local reference is selected, the motor speed will only depend on the local reference set via the control panel, regardless of whether Hand mode or Auto mode has been selected.
204 Minimum Reference
(MIN. REFERENCE)
Value:
If parameter 100, Configuration = Open loop,
0.000Hz to parameter 205, Maximum Reference. ✭ 0.000 Hz
If parameter 100 Configuration = Closed loop, parameter 413, Minimum Feedback, to parameter 205, Maximum Reference.

The unit for the reference can be seen from the following table:
Unit
Hz
Par. 415

Parameter 100 Configuration = Open loop
Parameter 100 Configuration = Closed loop

Description of choice:
Minimum Reference is the lowest reference value that can be set for the drive.
205 Maximum Reference
(MAX. REFERENCE)
Value:
If parameter 100, Configuration = Open loop, parameter 204, Minimum Reference, to 1000.000 Hz
✭60.000 Hz
If parameter 100, Configuration = Closed loop, parameter 204, Minimum Reference, to parameter 414, Maximum Feedback.

✭60.000 Hz

Function:
The Maximum Reference sets the maximum value of the sum of all references. If Closed loop has been selected in parameter 100,
Configuration, the maximum reference cannot be set above parameter
414, Maximum Feedback. The Maximum Reference is ignored when the local reference is active.
The reference unit can be determined from the following table:
Parameter 100 Configuration = Open loop
Parameter 100 Configuration = Closed loop

Description of choice:
Maximum reference is the highest reference value that can be set for the drive.

✭ 0.000 Hz

Function:
The Minimum Reference sets the minimum value of the sum of all references. If Closed loop has been selected in parameter 100,
Configuration, the minimum reference is limited by parameter 413,
Minimum Feedback.
Minimum reference is ignored when the local reference is active. In this case, minimum reference is determined by parameter 201, Minimum
Frequency.
NOTE
For fan applications, factory setting of parameter 204 is 6 Hz. For pump applications, factory setting for parameter 204 is 18 Hz.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
44

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Unit
Hz
Par. 415

206 Ramp Up Time
Value:
1 to 3600 seconds

(RAMP UP TIME)
5 Depends on the unit

Function:
The ramp up time is the acceleration time from 0 Hz to the rated motor frequency set in parameter 104. It is assumed that the output current does not reach the current limit set in parameter 215. This determines the maximum acceleration rate for all modes of operation.
Description of choice:
Program the desired accel time. Too long of a ramp up time can cause sluggish drive operation. Too short of a ramp up time can cause the drive to go into current limit during acceleration or cause unacceptable torque pulses in the controlled system.
NOTE
For fan applications, factory setting of parameter 206 is 60 seconds. For pump applications, factory setting for parameter 206 is 10 seconds.

Description of choice:
Program the desired decel time. Too long of a ramp down time can cause sluggish operation. Too short of a ramp down time can cause the drive to trip off due to high DC bus voltage or cause unacceptable torque pulses in the controlled system.
NOTE
Factory setting of parameter 207 for fan applications, is 60 seconds. For pump applications, factory setting for parameter 207 is 10 seconds.
208 Automatic Ramp Down
Value:
Disable (DISABLE)
5 Enable (ENABLE)

(AUTO RAMPING)
[0]
[1]

Function:
This function ensures that the drive does not trip during deceleration if the decel time set is too short. If, during deceleration, the DC bus voltage increases to the maximum value permitted, the drive automatically extends the ramp-down time.

! CAUTION
If auto ramping is enabled, ramp time can be considerably longer than that set in parameter
207.
Description of choice:
Program this function as Enable to avoid trips caused by too rapid a deceleration. 209 Jog Frequency
(JOG FREQUENCY)
Value:
Parameter 201, Output Frequency Low Limit, to parameter 202
Output Frequency High Limit
5 10.0 HZ

207 Ramp Down Time
Value:
1 to 3600 seconds

(RAMP DOWN TIME)

Function:
The jog frequency is the fixed output frequency at which the drive is running when the jog function is activated.
Jog can be activated via the digital inputs.

5 Depends on the unit

Function:
The ramp-down time is the deceleration time from the rated motor frequency set in parameter 104, Motor Frequency, to 0 Hz. This ramp-down time may be automatically extended to prevent an overvoltage trip if the load regenerates to the drive. This determines the maximum deceleration rate for all modes of operation.

Description of choice:
Set the desired frequency.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

45

Reference Type
The example below shows how the resulting reference is calculated when Preset references are used together with Sum and Relative references set in parameter 210, Reference Type. A formula for calculating the resulting reference is given under Calculation of
Resulting Reference. See the drawing under Reference Handling.

Example:
The following parameters have been set:
Parameter 204 Minimum Reference:
Parameter 205 Maximum Reference:
Parameter 211 Preset Reference:
Parameter 308 Terminal 53, Analog Input:
Parameter 309 Terminal 53, Min. Scaling:
Parameter 310 Terminal 53, Max. Scaling:

10 Hz
60 Hz
15%
Reference
0V
10 V

When parameter 210 Reference Type is set to Sum, one of the adjusted Preset References, parameters 211 through 214, will be added to the external references as a percentage of the reference range. If terminal 53 has an analog input voltage of 4 V, the resulting reference will be:
Parameter 210 Reference type = Sum
Parameter 204 Minimum Reference
Reference contribution at 4 V
Parameter 211 Preset Reference
Resulting reference

= 10.0 Hz
= 16.0 Hz
= 6.0 Hz
= 32.0 Hz

If parameter 210 Reference Type is set to Relative, one of the adjusted
Preset References parameters 211 through 214 will be totaled as a percentage of the sum of the present external references. If terminal 53 has an analog input voltage of 4 V, the resulting reference will be:
Parameter 210 Reference type = Relative
Parameter 204 Minimum Reference
Reference contribution at 4 V
Parameter 211 Preset Reference
Resulting reference

= 10.0 Hz
= 16.0 Hz
= 2.4 Hz
= 28.4 Hz

The graph in the next column shows the resulting reference while the external reference changes from 0 to 10 V. Parameter 210, Reference
Type has been programmed for Sum and Relative. Parameter 211,
Preset Reference 1, is programmed for 0%.

210 Reference Type
(REF. FUNCTION)
Value:
Sum (SUM)
[0]
Relative (RELATIVE)
[1]
5 External/preset (EXTERNAL/PRESET)
[2]
Function:
It is possible to define how the preset references are added to the other references. For this purpose, Sum or Relative is used. It is also possible, by using the External/Preset function, to select between the external references and a preset reference.
Description of choice:
If Sum is selected, one of the preset references (parameters 211 through 214, Preset Reference) is added to the other external references as a percentage of the reference range (minimum reference through maximum reference).
If Relative is selected, one of the adjusted preset references (parameters 211 through 214, Preset Reference) is added as a percentage of the total external reference.
If External/Preset is selected, it is possible to shift between the external references and the preset references using terminals 16, 17, 29, 32 or
33 (parameters 300, 301, 305, 306 or 307, Digital Inputs). Preset references are a percentage value of the reference range. External reference is the sum of the analog references, pulse references and any references from serial communication.

! CAUTION
If Sum or Relative is selected, one of preset references will always be active. If preset references are not used, they must be set to 0%.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
46

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

211 Preset Reference 1
(PRESET REF. 1)
212 Preset Reference 2
(PRESET REF. 2)
213 Preset Reference 3
(PRESET REF. 3)
214 Preset Reference 4
(PRESET REF. 4)
Value:
-100.00 % to +100.00 %
5 0.00% of the reference range or external reference
Function:
Four different preset references can be programmed in parameters 211 to 214, Preset Reference. The preset reference is stated as a percentage of the reference range or as a percentage of the other external references, depending upon the choice made in parameter
210, Reference Type.
The choice of preset references is made by activating terminals 16, 17,
29, 32 or 33, as shown in the table below.
Terminal 17/29/33
Terminal 16/29/32 preset reference msb preset reference lsb
0
0
Preset reference 1
0
1
Preset reference 2
1
0
Preset reference 3
1
1
Preset reference 4
Description of choice:
Set the required preset reference(s) that is/are to be used.
215 Current Limit
Value:
0.1 to 1.1 x rated current

216

Frequency Bypass, Bandwidth
(FREQUENCY BYPASS B.W.)

Value:
0 (OFF) to 100 Hz

5 DISABLED

Function:
Mechanical resonance in the driven system sometimes makes it desirable to avoid operation at critical speeds.
These output frequencies can be programmed in parameters 217 through 220.
In this parameter, Frequency Bypass, Bandwidth, the width of the frequency to be bypassed is defined.
Description of choice:
The bypass bandwidth is equal to the programmed bandwidth frequency. This bandwidth will be centered around each bypass frequency. 217 Frequency Bypass 1
(BYPASS FREQ. 1)
218 Frequency Bypass 2
(BYPASS FREQ. 2)
219 Frequency Bypass 3
(BYPASS FREQ. 3)
220 Frequency Bypass 4
(BYPASS FREQ. 4)
Value:
0 to 120 or 1000 HZ
5 120.0 Hz
The frequency range depends on the selection made in parameter
200, Output Frequency Range.

(CURRENT LIMIT)
5 1.1 x rated current

Function:
This is where the maximum output current is set. If the motor attempts to draw more than this amount of current, the drive will reduce its output frequency until the current is less than or equal to the current limit value. Function:
Some systems require that some output frequencies be avoided because of mechanical resonance problems in the system.
Description of choice:
Enter the frequencies to be avoided.
See also parameter 216, Frequency Bypass, Bandwidth.

The factory setting corresponds to the rated output current. If the current limit is to be used as motor protection, the rated motor current must be set. If the current limit is set within the range of 1.0 to 1.1 times the rated output current of the drive, the drive can only handle current greater than its rated output intermittently. After the load has been higher than rated output current limit, it must be reduced to a level that is lower than the rated current of the drive for a period of time.
Note that if the current limit is set to less than the maximum value of the drive, acceleration torque is reduced correspondingly.
Description of choice:
Set the required maximum output current.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

47

Warning Functions
The warning functions in parameters 221 through 228 are not active during ramp-up after a Start command, ramp down after a Stop command, or while stopped. The warning functions are activated when the output frequency has reached the resulting reference.
The signal outputs can be programmed to generate a warning signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via the relay outputs.
The reference limits in parameter 226, Warning: High Reference and parameter 227, Warning: Low Reference are only active when remote reference has been selected.
221 Warning: Low Current
(WARN. LOW CURR)
Value:
0.0 to parameter 222 Warning: High current
✭ 0.0 A
Function:
When the motor current is below the limit programmed in this parameter, the display shows a flashing CURRENT LOW, provided Warning has been selected in parameter 409, Function in Case of No Load. The drive will trip if parameter 409 has been selected as Trip. This can be used to indicate when a belt between the motor and the driven load is broken. Description of choice:
The lower signal limit must be programmed within the normal working range of the drive.

222 Warning: High Current (WARN. HIGH CURR)
Value:
Parameter 221 to 1.1 x rated current
5 1.1 x rated current
Function:
If the motor current is above the limit programmed in this parameter, the display shows a flashing CURRENT HIGH.
Description of choice:
The upper signal limit of the motor frequency must be programmed within the normal working range of the drive. See the drawing at parameter 221, Warning: Low Current.
223

Warning: Low Frequency
(WARN. LOW FREQ)

Value:
0.0 to parameter 224

5 0.0 Hz

Function:
If the output frequency is below the limit programmed in this parameter, the display will show a flashing F OUT < FLOW.
Description of choice:
The lower signal limit of the motor frequency must be programmed within the normal working range of the drive. See drawing at parameter
221 Warning: Low current.
224

Warning: High Frequency
(WARN. HIGH FREQ.)

Value:
Par. 200 Output frequency range = 0 to 120 Hz parameter 223 - 120 Hz
Par. 200 Output frequency range = 0 to 1000 Hz parameter 223 - 1000 Hz

✭ 120.0 Hz
✭ 120.0 Hz

Function:
If the output frequency is above the limit programmed in this parameter, the display will show a flashing F OUT > F HIGH
Description of choice:
The higher signal limit of the motor frequency must be programmed within the normal working range of the drive. See the drawing at parameter 221, Warning: Low Current.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
48

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

225

Warning: Low Reference
(WARN. LOW REF)

Value:
-999,999.999 - High Reference (par. 226) 5 -999,999.999 Hz
Function:
When the total remote reference is less than the limit programmed in this parameter, the display shows a flashing REF. < REF. LOW
The reference limits in parameter 226, Warning: High Reference and parameter 225, Warning: Low Reference are only active when remote reference has been selected.
In Open Loop, the unit for the reference is Hz, while in Closed Loop the unit is programmed in parameter 415, Process Units.
Description of choice:
When parameter 100, Configuration, has been programmed for Open
Loop, the lower signal limit of the reference must be programmed within the normal working range of the drive. If parameter 100 is programmed as Closed Loop, Low Reference must be within the reference range programmed in parameters 204 and 205.
226

Warning: High Reference
(WARN. HIGH REF)

Value:
Reference Low (par. 225) to 999,999.999 5 -999,999.999 Hz
Function:
If the resulting reference is below the limit programmed in this parameter, the display flashes REF. > REF. HIGH.,

227

Warning: Low Feedback
(WARN .LOW FDBK)

Value:
-999,999.999 to High Feedback (parameter 228)
5 -999,999.999
Function:
If the feedback signal is below the limit of Low Feedback programmed in this parameter, the display will flash FEEDBACK < FOB LOW.
The unit for feedback is programmed in parameter 415, Process Units.
Description of choice:
Set the desired value within the feedback range, parameter 413,
Minimum Feedback, and parameter 414, Maximum Feedback.
228

Warning: High Feedback
(WARN. HIGH FDBK)

Value:
Low Feedback (parameter 227) to 999,999.999
5999,999.999
Function:
If the feedback signal is above the limit programmed in this parameter, the display will show a flashing FEEDBACK > FOB HIGH.
The unit for feedback is programmed in parameter 415, Process Units.
Description of choice:
Set the required value within the feedback range, parameter 413,
Minimum Feedback, and parameter 414, Maximum Feedback.

The reference limits in parameter 226 Warning: High Reference and parameter 225 Warning: Low Reference are only active when remote reference has been selected.
In Open Loop, the unit for the reference is Hz, while in Closed Loop the unit is programmed in parameter 415, Process Units.
Description of choice:
The high reference warning must be programmed within the normal working range of the drive, provided parameter 100 Configuration has been programmed for Open Loop. If parameter 100 has been programmed for Closed Loop, Reference High must be within the reference range programmed in parameters 204 and 205.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

49

Inputs and Outputs
Parameters 300 through 328
In this parameter group, the functions of the drive input and output terminals are defined. The digital inputs are through terminals 16, 17,
18, 19, 27, 32 and 33. Inputs are programmed by parameters 300 through 307. The table below shows the functions available for input.
Digital inputs require a signal of 0 or 24 VDC. A signal lower than
5 VDC is a logic ‘0’, while a signal higher than 10 VDC is a logic ‘1’.
The terminals for the digital inputs can be connected to the internal 24
VDC supply through terminals 12 and 13, or an external 24 VDC supply can be connected.
The drawings at the right show one setup using the internal 24 VDC supply and one setup using an external 24 VDC supply.

Switch 4 is used for separating the common potential of the internal
24 VDC supply from the common potential of an external 24 VDC supply. Switch 4 is the DIP switch on the far right of the group of DIP switches located on the lower right of the control card, just above the control terminals.
When Switch 4 is in the OFF position, the external 24 VDC supply is galvanically isolated from the drive.

Digital Inputs

Terminal Number:
Parameter:

16
300

17
301

18
302

19
303

27
304

29
305

32
306

33
307

Value:
No function
(NO OPERATION)
[0] ✭[0]
[0]
[0]
[0] ✭[0] ✭[0]
Reset
(RESET)
✭[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
Coasting stop, inverse
(COAST INVERSE)
[0]
Reset and coasting stop, inverse (RESET & COAST INVERSE)
[1]
Start
(START)
✭[1]
Reversing
(REVERSE)
✭ [1]
Reversing and start
(START REVERSE)
[2]
DC-braking, inverse
(DC BRAKE INVERSE)
[3]
[2]
Safety interlock
(SAFETY INTERLOCK)
✭[3]
Freeze reference
(FREEZE REFERENCE)
[2]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[2]
Freeze output
(FREEZE OUTPUT)
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
Selection of Setup, lsb
(SETUP SELECT LSB)
[4]
[4]
[4]
Selection of Setup, msb
(SETUP SELECT MSB)
[4]
[5]
[4]
Preset reference, on
(PRESET REF. ON)
[5]
[5]
[6]
[5]
[5]
Preset reference, lsb
(PRESET REF. LSB)
[6]
[7]
[6]
Preset reference, msb
(PRESET REF. MSB)
[6]
[8]
[6]
Speed down
(SPEED DOWN)
[7]
[9]
[7]
Speed up
(SPEED UP)
[7]
[10]
[7]
Start enabled
(RUN PERMISSIVE)
[8]
[8]
[11]
[8]
[8]
Jog
(JOG)
[9]
[9]
✭[12]
[9]
[9]
Data change lock
(PROGRAMMING LOCK)
[10] [10]
[13]
[10] [10]
Pulse reference
(PULSE REFERENCE)
[11]
[14]
Pulse feedback
(PULSE FEEDBACK)
[11]
Hand start
(HAND START)
[11] [12]
[15]
[11] [12]
Auto start
(AUTOSTART)
[12] [13]
[16]
[12] [13]
✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
50

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Function:
In parameters 300 through 307, Digital Inputs, the functions of terminals 16 through 33 are selected.
These options are shown in the table on the previous page.
Description of choice:
No Function is selected if the drive is not to react to signals transmitted to the terminal.

Freeze Reference freezes the present reference. The frozen reference can only be changed by means of Speed Up or Speed
Down. The frozen reference is saved after a stop command and when power is removed.
Freeze Output freezes the present output frequency. The frozen output frequency can now only be changed by means of Speed Up or
Speed Down.

! WARNING

Reset allows reset of the drive after a resettable fault. Not all faults can be reset without removing and reapplying the input power. Faults that require the removal of input power are called trip lock faults. See
Warnings and Alarms.
Coasting Stop, Inverse is used to release the motor immediately by turning off the output transistors. The motor will coast freely to a stop.
Inverse indicates a closed terminal sends the stop signal. Logic ‘0’ implements coasting to a stop.
Reset and Coasting Stop, Inverse is used for activating coasting stop at the same time as reset. Inverse indicates a closed terminal sends the stop signal. Logic ‘0’ implements coasting stop and reset.
DC Braking, Inverse is used for stopping the motor by energizing it with a DC voltage for a given time, as set by parameters 114 and 115.
Inverse indicates a closed terminal sends the braking signal. Logic ‘0’ implements DC braking. See the DC braking parameters.
Safety Interlock is the same as Coasting Stop, Inverse, except Safety
Interlock generates an alarm message on the display when terminal 27 is logic ‘0’. The alarm message will also be active through digital outputs
42 and 45 and relay outputs 1 and 2, if programmed for Safety
Interlock.

! WARNING
Do not choose Safety Interlock for drives with software version 1.03. See parameter 624 to determine software version of drive.
Start is selected for a remote Start/Stop command.
Logic ‘1’ = Start.
Logic ‘0’ = Stop.
Reversing is used for changing the direction of rotation of the motor.
Logic ‘0’ is for forward. Logic ‘1’ is for reverse. The drive can be safely reversed while it is driving the motor. The reversing signal only changes the direction of rotation, it does not activate the start function. It is not active in Closed Loop mode.
Reversing and Start is used for Start/Stop and reversing using the same signal. A start signal through terminal 18 starts the drive in the forward direction. If both terminal 18 and a reversing and start terminal are given a logic ‘1’ at the same time, the drive will not start. It is not active in Closed Loop.

If Freeze Output is active, the drive cannot be stopped via terminal 18.
To stop the drive when Freeze Output is active, one of the four methods listed below must be used.
-

Turn off the Freeze Output function and perform a normal stop.
Press the keypad Off/Stop key.
Remove the control voltage to terminal 27.
If terminal 19 is programmed in parameter 303 for DC Brake
Inverse, remove the control voltage to it.

Selection of Setup, Lsb* and Selection of Setup, Msb** enables digital selection of the four possible setups. To enable this, parameter
002 Active Setup must be set to Multi Setup.
Setup 1
Setup 2
Setup 3
Setup 4

Setup, Msb
0
0
1
1

Setup, Lsb
0
1
0
1

*Lsb - Least significant bit. **Msb - Most significant bit.
Preset Reference, on is used for switching between remote controlled reference and preset reference. This assumes that Remote/preset has been selected in parameter 210, Reference Type. Logic ‘0’ = remote controlled references active; logic ‘1’ = one of the four preset references is active in accordance with the table below.
Preset Reference, Lsb and Preset reference, Msb enables a choice of one of the four preset references, in accordance with the table below. Preset ref. 1
Preset ref. 2
Preset ref. 3
Preset ref. 4

Preset ref. msb
0
0
1
1

Preset ref. lsb
0
1
0
1

Speed Up and Speed Down are selected if digital control of the up/ down speed is desired. This function is only active if Freeze Reference or Freeze Output has been selected.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

51

As long as there is a logic ‘1’ on the terminal selected for Speed Up, the reference or the output frequency will increase by the Ramp-up Time set in parameter 206.
As long as there is a logic ‘1’ on the terminal selected for Speed Down, the reference or the output frequency will decrease by the Ramp-down
Time set in parameter 207.
Pulses (logic ‘1’ minimum high for 3 ms and a minimum pause of 3 ms) will lead to a change of speed of 0.1% (reference) or 0.1 Hz (output frequency). Example:

No speed change
Speed down
Speed up
Speed down

Terminal
(16)
0
0
1
1

Terminal
(17)
0
1
0
1

Freeze ref./
Freeze output
1
1
1
1

The speed reference frozen through the control panel can be changed even if the drive has stopped. In addition, the frozen reference will be retained in memory after power interruption.
Run Permissive. Run Permissive is used to require a second “run permission” signal in addition to the normal run command, either in
Hand or Auto mode. When a run command alone is given, the display will show RUN REQ., but the drive will not start. The drive can also indicate that a run has been requested through one of the transistorized or relay outputs. When, in addition to the run command, a logic ‘1’ is applied to the Run Permissive terminal, the drive will run. If more than one terminal is programmed for Run Permissive, a logic ‘1’ at any of these terminals will allow the drive to run.
Jog is used to start the drive and run it at the frequency set in parameter 209, Jog Frequency. Jog is active in both Hand and Auto mode. Jog is not active if a stop command has been given through the keypad or terminal 27.
Data change lock is selected if changes to parameters are not to be made via the control panel. It is be possible to change parameters through the serial bus.

52

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Pulse reference is selected if the frequency of a pulse train is to be used as a reference signal. 0 Hz corresponds to parameter 204,
Minimum Reference. The frequency set in parameter 327, Pulse
Reference, Maximum Frequency corresponds to parameter 205
Maximum Reference.
Pulse feedback is selected if the frequency of a pulse train is to be used as a feedback signal. Parameter 328, Pulse Feedback, Maximum
Frequency is the pulse frequency that corresponds to maximum feedback. Hand start is selected if an external signal is used to switch the drive to Hand mode. A logic ‘1’ (Hand Start active) will start the motor. A logic
‘0’ will stop the motor. The drive will then be in OFF/STOP mode, unless there is an active Auto Start signal from an external source.
Programming one of the digital inputs for Hand Start will disable the
LCP Hand Start and Auto Start keys.

! DANGER
Active Hand and Auto signals from digital inputs can cause drive to start unexpectedly.
Remove power from drive before servicing driven equipment.
Auto start is selected if an external signal is sent to switch the drive to
Auto mode. When a start signal is active on the control terminals or the serial communication port, the drive will start the motor. If Auto Start and
Hand Start are active at the same time on the control terminals, Auto
Start will have the higher priority. If Auto Start and Hand Start are not active, the motor will stop and the drive will then be in the OFF/STOP mode. Programming one of the digital inputs for Auto Start will disable the LCP Hand Start and Auto Start keys.

Analog Inputs

Feedback. If a feedback signal is connected, a voltage input may be connected to either terminal 53 or 54, or a current input conected to terminal 60. If a two zone PID control is used, the feedback signals must be voltage inputs and applied to terminals 53 and 54. See Feedback
Handling.

Two analog inputs for voltage signals, terminals 53 and 54, and an analog input for current, terminal 60, are provided for reference and feedback signals. A thermistor can be connected to the voltage inputs, terminals 53 or 54.
The two analog voltage inputs can be scaled over the range of
0 to 10 V DC. The current input can be scaled over the range of 0 to 20 mA.

Thermistor. Selected if a thermistor in the motor stops the drive in case of motor overtemperature. The cutout value is 3 kohm. A Klixon thermal switch may also be connected to this input. If parallel sensors are used, the thermistors/thermal switches can be connected in series. The drive will shut down when the total resistance exceeds 3 kohms.

The table below shows the possible analog input programming.
Parameter 317, Time Out, and Parameter 318, Function After Time
Out, allow activation of a time-out function on all analog inputs. If the signal value of the reference or feedback signal connected to one of the analog input terminals drops below 50% of the minimum scaling, the function set in parameter 318, Function After Time Out, will be activated after the time-out set in parameter 317.
Analog Inputs
Terminal Number
53 (Voltage)
54 (Voltage)
308 Terminal 53, Analog Input Voltage
60 (Current) 53 FUNCT.)
(AI [V]

Function:
This parameter is used to select the required function to be linked to terminal 53.

NOTE
When a thermistor is mounted in motor wiring, a breakdown of insulation between thermistor and motor can feed high voltage back to drive control terminals. To comply with protective extra-low voltage (PELV) grounding requirements, if applicable, thermistor must be mounted externally.
Parameter 117, Motor Thermal Protection, must be programmed for
Thermal Warning or Thermistor Trip, and the thermistor must be inserted between terminal 53 or 54, analog voltage input, and terminal
50, 10 V supply.

Description of choice:
No operation. Selected if the drive is not to react to signals connected to the terminal.
Reference. Selected to enable change of reference by means of an analog reference signal. If reference signals are connected to several inputs, these reference signals will be summed.

Analog Inputs

Terminal Number
Parameter

53
308

54
311

60
314

Value:
No operation
Reference
Feedback
Thermistor

(NO OPERATION)
(REFERENCE
(FEEDBACK)
(THERMISTOR)

5[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]

5[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]

[0]
5[1]
[2]

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

53

309

Terminal 53, Minimum Scaling
(AI 53 SCALE LOW)

312

Value:
0.0 to 10.0 V

5 0.0 V

Terminal 54, Minimum Scaling
(AI 54 SCALE LOW)

Value:
0.0 to 10.0 V

5 0.0 V

Function:
This parameter is used for setting the signal value that corresponds to the minimum reference or the minimum feedback, parameter 204,
Minimum Reference, or parameter 413, Minimum Feedback. See
Reference Handling or Feedback Handling.

Function:
This parameter is used to set the signal value that corresponds to the minimum reference value or the minimum feedback, parameter 204,
Minimum Reference, and parameter 413, Minimum Feedback. See
Reference Handling or Feedback Handling.

Description of choice:
Set the required voltage value. For reasons of accuracy, voltage losses in long signal lines should be compensated for. If the time out functions in parameter 317, Time Out, and parameter 318, Function
After Time Out, are to be used, the value must be set to > 1 V.

Description of choice:
Set the required voltage value. For reasons of accuracy, voltage losses in long signal lines should be compensated for.

310

Terminal 53, Maximum Scaling
(AI 53 SCALE HIGH)

Value:
0.0 to 10.0 V

313
5 10.0 V

Function:
This parameter is used to set the signal value that corresponds to the maximum reference value or the maximum feedback, parameter 205,
Maximum Reference, or parameter 414, Maximum Feedback. See
Reference Handling or Feedback Handling.
Description of choice:
Set the required voltage value.
For reasons of accuracy, voltage losses in long signal lines should be compensated for.
311

Terminal 54, Analog Input Voltage
(AI [V] 54 FUNCT.)

Value:
See the description of parameter 308.

If the time out function is to be applied, parameter 317, Time Out, and parameter 318, Function After Time Out, the value must be set to > 1 V.

5 No operation

Function:
This parameter selects the function of terminal 54.
The input signal is scaled by parameter 312, Terminal 54, Minimum
Scaling, and by parameter 313, Terminal 54, Maximum Scaling.
Description of choice:
See description of parameter 308.

Terminal 54, Maximum Scaling
(AI 54 SCALE HIGH)

Value:
0.0 to 10.0 V

5 10.0 V

Function:
This parameter is used to set the signal value that corresponds to the maximum reference value or the maximum feedback, parameter 205,
Maximum Reference, or parameter 414, Maximum Feedback. See
Reference Handling or Feedback Handling.
Description of choice:
Set the required voltage value. For reasons of accuracy, voltage losses in long signal lines should be compensated for.
314

Terminal 60, Analog Input Current
(AI [mA] 60 FUNCT.)

Value:
See description of parameter 308.

5 Reference

Function:
This parameter selects the function of terminal 60.
Scaling of the input signal is set by parameter 315, Terminal 60,
Minimum Scaling, and by parameter 316, Terminal 60, Maximum
Scaling.
Description of choice:
See description of parameter 308, Terminal 53, Analog Input Voltage.

For reasons of accuracy, voltage losses in long signal lines should be compensated for.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
54

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

315

Terminal 60, Minimum Scaling
(AI 60 SCALE LOW)

Value:
0.0 to 20.0 mA

317

5 4.0 mA

Function:
This parameter determines the signal value that corresponds to the minimum reference or the minimum feedback, parameter 204 Minimum
Reference, parameter 413, Minimum Feedback. See Reference
Handling or Feedback Handling.
Description of choice:
Set the required current value.
If the time-out function is to be used, parameter 317, Time Out, and parameter 318, Function After Time Out, the value must be set to
> 2 mA.
316

Terminal 60, Maximum Scaling
(AI 60 SCALE HIGH)

Value:
0.0 to 20.0 mA

Function:
This parameter determines the signal value that corresponds to the maximum reference or maximum feedback, parameter 205, Maximum
Reference Value, or parameter 414, Maximum Feedback. See
Reference Handling or Feedback Handling.
Description of choice:
Set the desired current value.

Value:
1 to 99 sec.

5 10 sec.

Function:
If the signal value of the reference or feedback signal connected to one of the input terminals 53, 54 or 60 drops to below 50% of the minimum scaling for a longer period than the Live Zero time, the function selected in parameter 318, Function After Time Out, will be activated.
This function will only be active if, in parameter 309 or 312, a value has been selected for Terminals 53 and 54, Minimum Scaling, that exceeds
1 V, or if, in parameter 315, Terminal 60, Minimum Scaling, a value has been selected that exceeds 2 mA.
Description of choice:
Set the desired time.
318

5 20.0 mA

Time Out
(LIVE ZERO TIME)

Function After Time Out
(LIVE ZERO FUNCT.)

Value:
5 Off (NO FUNCTION)
Freeze output frequency
(FREEZE OUTPUT FREQ.)
Stop (STOP)
Jog (JOG FREQUENCY)
Max. output frequency (MAX FREQUENCY)
Stop and trip (STOP AND TRIP)

[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]

Function:
This is where to select the function to be activated after the end of the time-out period, parameter 317, Time Out.
If a time-out function occurs at the same time as a bus time-out function, parameter 510, Bus Time Interval Function, the time-out function in parameter 318 will be activated.
Description of choice:
The output frequency of the drive can: go to minimum (NO FUNCTION) be frozen at the present value (FREEZE OUTPUT
FREQUENCY)
stop (STOP) run at the jog frequency set in parameter 209
(JOG FREQUENCY) run at the maximum frequency set in parameter 202
(MAX. FREQUENCY) stop and send an alarm (STOP AND TRIP)

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

55

Analog/Digital Outputs
The two analog/digital outputs available through terminals 42 and 45 can be programmed to show a status or an analog value such as frequency. The status signal is a 24 VDC output.

Analog/Digital Outputs
Analog/Digital Outputs

For the analog output, there is a choice of three types of output signal:
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 32000 pulses. The pulse rate is set by parameter 322, Terminal 45, Output, Pulse Scaling.
See the Electrical Installation, Control Terminals section of this manual for the ratings of these outputs.

Number:
Terminal Number :
Parameter:

Value:
No function (NO FUNCTION)
Drive ready (READY)
Standby (ENABLED & NO WARNING)
Running (RUNNING)
Running at ref. value (RUNNING AT REFERENCE)
Running, no warning (RUNNING NO WARNING)
Local reference active (DRIVE IN LOCAL REF.)
Remote controlled references active (DRIVE IN REMOTE REF.)
Alarm (ALARM)
Alarm or warning (ALARM OR WARNING)
No alarm (NO ALARM)
Current limit (CURRENT LIMIT)
Safety interlock (SAFETY INTERLOCK)
Start command active (START SIGNAL APPLIED)
Reversing (RUNNING IN REVERSE)
Thermal warning (THERMAL WARNING)
Hand mode active (DRIVE IN HAND MODE)
Auto mode active (DRIVE IN AUTO MODE)
Sleep mode (SLEEP MODE)
Output frequency lower than parameter 223 (F OUT < F LOW)
Output frequency higher than parameter 223 (F OUT > F HIGH)
Out of frequency range (FREQ. RANGE WARN.)
Output current lower than low current, parameter 221 (I OUT < I LOW)
Output current higher than high current, parameter 222 (I OUT > I HIGH)
Out of current range (CURRENT RANGE WARN)
Out of feedback range (FEEDBACK RANGE WARN.)
Out of reference range (REFERENCE RANGE WARN)
Relay 123 (RELAY 123)
Input phase loss (MAINS PHASE LOSS)
Output frequency, (OUT. FREQ. 0-20 mA)
Output frequency, (OUT. FREQ. 4-20 mA)
Output frequency (pulse sequence), (OUT. FREQ. PULSE)
External reference, (EXT. REF. 0-20 mA)
External reference, (EXTERNAL REF. 4-20 mA)
External reference (pulse sequence), (EXTERNAL REF. PULSE)
Feedback, (FEEDBACK 0-20 mA)
Feedback, (FEEDBACK 4-20 mA)
Feedback (pulse sequence), (FEEDBACK PULSE)
Output current, 0-20 mA (MOTOR CUR. 0-20mA)
Output current, 4-20 mA (MOTOR CUR. 4-20mA)
Output current (pulse sequence), 0 - 32000 p (MOTOR CUR PULSE)
Output power, 0-20 mA (MOTOR POWER 0-20mA)
Output power, 4-20 mA (MOTOR POWER 4-20mA)
Output power (pulse sequence), 0- 32000 pulses (MOTOR POWER PULSE)

terminal no.
42
319
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[36]
[37]
[38]
5 [39]
[40]
[41]
[42]
[43]

45
321
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
5 [30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[36]
[37]
[38]
[39]
[40]
[41]
[42]
[43]

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
56

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Function:
These outputs can act both as digital and analog outputs. If used as a digital output, a 0 or 24 VDC signal is transmitted. If used as an analog output, either a 0 to 20 mA signal, a 4 to 20 mA signal, or a pulse sequence with a frequency of 0 to up to 32,000 Hz is transmitted.
Description of choice:
No function. Selected if this output is always to remain off.
Drive ready. The drive’s control card receives a supply voltage and the drive is ready for operation.
Stand by. The drive is ready for operation, but no start command has been given. No warning.
Running. The drive is running or the drive is in the sleep mode.
Running at ref. value. The drive is at the speed commanded by the reference. Running, no warning. The drive is running and there are no warnings. Local reference active. The motor’s speed is being controlled by the local reference through the keypad. This output will also be on if the drive is set up for local speed control but the jog function has been activated. Remote references active. The motor’s speed is being controlled by a remote reference or a preset speed.

Output frequency lower than low frequency warning level. The output frequency is lower than the value set in parameter 223,
Warning: Low Frequency.
Output frequency higher than high frequency warning level.
The output frequency is higher than the value set in parameter 224,
Warning: High Frequency.
Out of frequency range. The output frequency is outside the frequency range programmed in parameter 223, Warning: Low
Frequency, and 224, Warning: High Frequency.
Output current lower than low current warning level. The output current is lower than the value set in parameter 221, Warning: Low
Current. This can be used to indicate a broken belt.
Output current higher than high current warning level. The output current is higher than the value set in parameter 222, Warning:
High Current.
Out of current range. The output current is outside the range programmed in parameter 221, Warning: Low Current, and parameter
222, Warning: High Current.
Out of feedback range. The feedback signal is outside the range programmed in parameter 227 Warning: Low Feedback, and 228
Warning: High feedback.

Alarm. The drive has been stopped by an alarm.

Out of reference range. The reference is outside the range programmed in parameter 225, Warning: Low Reference, and parameter 226, Warning: High Reference.

Alarm or warning. An alarm or a warning exists in the drive.

Relay 123. This function is only used when a Profibus option card is installed.

No alarm. The drive has no alarm.

Input phase loss. An incoming power phase is missing.

Current limit. The output current is greater than or equal to the value programmed in parameter 215, Current Limit. The speed of the drive is being limited to keep the current from increasing.

Output frequency: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, and 0 to 32,000 pulses. An output signal proportional to the output frequency in the range from 0 to Output Frequency, High Limit, set by parameter 202.

Safety interlock. Terminal 27 has been programmed for Safety
Interlock in parameter 304, and no control voltage has been applied to it.

External reference: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, and 0 to 32,000 pulses. An output signal proportional to the resulting reference value in the range from Minimum Reference to Maximum Reference, set by parameters 204 and 205.

Start command active. The drive is either running or it has received a run command. This is commonly used in conjunction with the drive’s run permissive control.
Reversing. The drive is running in the reverse direction.
Thermal warning. The temperature limit of either the motor, the drive, or a thermistor connected to an analog input has been exceeded.
Hand mode active. The drive is operating in the Hand run/stop mode.
Auto mode active. The drive is operating in the Auto run/stop mode.
Sleep mode. The drive is stopped because of Sleep Mode.

Feedback Minimum to Feedback Maximum: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, and 0 to 32,000 pulses. An output signal proportional to the reference value in the range from Minimum Feedback to Maximum
Feedback, set by parameters 412 and 413.
Output Current: to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, and 0 to 32,000 pulses.
An output signal proportional to the output current in the range from 0 to the maximum drive output current.
Output power: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, and 0 to 32,000 pulses.
Generates an output signal proportional to the present output power. 20 mA corresponds to the value set by parameter 102, Motor Power.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

57

319

Terminal 42, Output
(AO 42 FUNCTION)

321

Value:

Terminal 45, Output
(AO 45 FUNCTION)

Value:

5 MOTOR CUR. 4-20 mA
See the description of analog/digital outputs.

5 OUT. FREQ. 4 - 20 mA
See the description of analog/digital outputs.

Function:
This output can function both as a digital and an analog output. When used as a digital output, it generates a 24 V (max. 40 mA) signal. For the analog outputs, there is a choice of 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA or a pulse sequence.

Function:
This output can function both as a digital and an analog output. When used as a digital output, it generates a 24 V (max. 40 mA) signal. For the analog outputs, there is a choice of 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA or a pulse sequence.

Description of choice:
See the description of analog/digital outputs.

Description of choice:
See the description of analog/digital outputs.

320

Terminal 42, Output Pulse Scaling
(AO 42 PULS SCALE)

Value:
1 to 32000 Hz

322

5 5000 Hz

Terminal 45, Output Pulse Scaling
(AO 45 PULS SCALE)

Value:
1 to 32000 Hz

Function:
This parameter allows scaling of the pulse output signal.

Function:
This parameter allows scaling of the pulse output signal.

Description of choice:
Set the desired value for the maximum pulse frequency.

5 5000 Hz

Description of choice:
Set the desired value for the maximum pulse frequency.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
58

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Relay Outputs

Relay 1:
1 - 3 normally closed, 1 - 2 normally open
Maximum:
240 VAC/DC, 2 A
Minimum:
24 VAC, 100 mA;
24 VDC, 10 mA
The high voltage relay connections are located near the input power and motor terminals.

Relay outputs

Relay 2:
4 - 5 normally open
Maximum:
30 VAC, 1 A,
42.5 VDC, 1 A

Relay 02

The low voltage relay terminals are located on the control wiring terminal strips. Relay Number:
Parameter:

1
323

2
326

Value:
No function (NO FUNCTION)
Drive ready (READY)
Waiting for start (ENABLED & NO WARNING)
Running (RUNNING)
Running at reference value (RUNNING AT REFERENCE)
Running, no warning (RUNNING NO WARNING)
Local reference active (DRIVE IN LOCAL REF)
Remote controlled references active (DRIVE IN REMOTE REF.)
Alarm (ALARM)
Alarm or warning (ALARM OR WARNING)
No alarm (NO ALARM)
Current limit (CURRENT LIMIT)
Safety interlock (SAFETY INTERLOCK)
Start command active (START SIGNAL APPLIED)
Running in reverse (RUNNING IN REVERSE)
Thermal warning (THERMAL WARNING)
Hand mode active (DRIVE IN HAND MODE)
Auto mode active (DRIVE IN AUTO MODE)
Sleep mode active (SLEEP MODE)
Output frequency lower than low frequency, parameter 223 (F OUT < F LOW)
Output frequency higher than high frequency, parameter 224 (F OUT > F HIGH)
Out of frequency range (FREQ RANGE WARN.)
Output current lower than low current, parameter 221 (I OUT < I LOW)
Output current higher than high current, parameter 222 (I OUT > I HIGH)
Out of current range (CURRENT RANGE WARN.)
Out of feedback range (FEEDBACK RANGE WARN.)
Out of reference range (REFERENCE RANGE WARN.)
Relay 123 (RELAY 123)
Input phase loss (MAINS PHASE LOSS)
Control word bit 11/12 (CONTROL WORD 11/12)

[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
5 [10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]

[0]
[1]
[2]
5 [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]

Function:
Relay outputs 1 and 2 can be used to give the present status or a warning. See the description of options in Analog/Digital Outputs.

If parameter 556, Bus Time Interval Function, becomes active, relay 1 and relay 2 will cut out if they are activated through serial communication. Control word bit 11/12 [29]. Relay 1 and relay 2 can be activated through serial communication. Bit 11 activates relay 1 and bit 12 activates relay 2.

Description of choice:
Select the output relay function.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

59

323

Relay 1, Output Function
(RELAY1 FUNCTION)
Function:

327

5 NO ALARM
Relay 1 is a form C relay that can be used for status indications and warnings. The relay is activated when the programmed condition occurs. Time delays for relay 1 are programmed in parameter 324, Relay 1,
ON Delay, and parameter 325, Relay 1, OFF Delay.

Pulse Reference, Maximum Frequency
(PULSE REF. MAX)

Value:
100 to 65,000 Hz at terminal 29
100 to 5,000 Hz at terminal 17

5 5,000 Hz

Function:
This parameter is used to set the pulse value that corresponds to the maximum reference, parameter 205, Maximum Reference.
The pulse reference signal can be connected to terminal 17 or 29.

Description of choice:
See data choice and connections under Relay Outputs.
324

Description of choice:
Set the required maximum pulse reference.

Relay 1, ON Delay
(RELAY1 ON DELAY)

328

Value:
0 to 600 sec.

5 0 sec.

Function:
This parameter determines the time delay before the relay activates.
Description of choice:
Enter the desired value.
325

Relay 1, OFF Delay
(RELAY1 OFF DELAY)

Pulse Feedback, Maximum Frequency
(PULSE FDBK MAX.)

Value:
100 to 65,000 Hz at terminal 33

5 25,000 Hz

Function:
This parameter is used to set the pulse value that corresponds to the maximum feedback value. The pulse feedback signal is connected to terminal 33.
Description of choice:
Set the desired feedback value.

Value:
0 to 600 sec.

5 2 sec.

Function:
This parameter determines the time delay before the relay deactivates.
Description of choice:
Enter the desired value.
326

Relay 2, Output Function
(RELAY2 FUNCTION)

Value:
See the functions of relay 1.

5 RUNNING

Function:
Relay 2 is a form A relay that can be used for status indications and warnings. The relay is activated when the programmed condition occurs. Description of choice:
See data choice and connections under Relay Outputs.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
60

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Application Functions
Parameters 400 through 427
Special functions of the drive are set up in this parameter group. This includes the proportional, integral, derivative controller (PID) and setting the sleep mode function.
Additionally, this parameter group includes:
Reset function
Flying start
Interference reduction
Loss of load
Carrier frequency
Selection of process units
400 Reset Function
(RESET FUNCTION)
Value:
Manual reset (MANUAL RESET)
[0]
Automatic reset x 1 (AUTOMATIC X 1)
[1]
Automatic reset x 2 (AUTOMATIC X 2)
[2]
Automatic reset x 3 (AUTOMATIC X 3)
[3]
Automatic reset x 4 (AUTOMATIC X 4)
[4]
Automatic reset x 5 (AUTOMATIC X 5)
[5]
Automatic reset x 10 (AUTOMATIC X 10)
[6]
Automatic reset x 15 (AUTOMATIC X 15)
[7]
Automatic reset x 20 (AUTOMATIC X 20)
[8]
5 Infinite automatic reset (INFINITE AUTOMATIC) [9]
Function:
This parameter allows a choice of manual or automatic reset after a fault trip. There is also a choice of the number of times the unit will attempt to restart. The time between each attempt is set in parameter 401,
Automatic Restart Time.
Description of choice:
If Manual Reset is selected, the Reset key must be pressed or a digital input given to reset the drive.
If auto reset after a fault trip is desired, select one of the Automatic reset choices. ! DANGER
If any automatic reset choices are selected, motor can start without warning.
401

Automatic Restart Time
(AUTORESTART TIME)

Value:
0 to 600 seconds
5 10 sec.
Function:
This parameter sets the automatic reset time delay until each reset is attempted. One of the automatic resets must be selected in parameter
400, Reset Function.
Description of choice:
Set the desired time before each restart attempt.

! CAUTION
When parameter 402, Flying Start, is enabled, motor may turn forward and reverse a few revolutions even with motor stopped. In highly dynamic pumping processes, it is recommended to disable Flying Start function.
402 Flying Start
(FLYING START)
Value:
5 Disable (DISABLE)
[0]
Enable (ENABLE)
[1]
DC brake and start (DC BRAKE AND START)
[3]
Function:
This function makes it possible for the drive to ‘catch’ a rotating motor when the drive is started. The drive will sense the speed of rotation and direction of rotation of the motor and synchronize with it.
This function is active whenever a start command is present.
For the drive to catch the spinning motor, the motor speed must be lower than the maximum frequency set in parameter 202.
Description of choice:
Select Disable if this function is not required.
Select Enable if the drive is to ‘catch’ and control a rotating motor.
Select DC brake and start if the drive is to brake the motor by means of the DC brake first, and then start. Ensure that parameters 114 through
116, DC Braking, are set appropriately. Select DC brake and start if the motor may be externally driven at a significant speed in the reverse direction. NOTE
For fan applications, factory setting for Flying
Start is Enable. For pump applications, factory setting for Flying Start is Disable.

Sleep Mode
Sleep mode makes it possible to stop the drive when the system demand drops below a preset level. When the demand increases to a higher preset level, the drive will restart. A significant amount of energy can be saved using sleep mode. Unlike a set-back time clock, the drive is always available to run when the demand reaches the preset “wake up” level. Sleep mode is not active if Local Reference is selected in parameter 203, Reference Handling, or if the Jog function activates via digital inputs. Sleep mode operates in both Open Loop and Closed
Loop.
Activate sleep mode in parameter 403, Sleep Mode Timer. In this parameter, set how long the output frequency must be lower than the sleep frequency set in parameter 404, Sleep Frequency, before sleep mode activates. After the set time, the drive will ramp down the motor to a stop, as controlled by parameter 207, Ramp Down Time. If the output

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

61

frequency needed to meet the system demand rises above the sleep frequency during the timed period, the drive will simply ramp up to the demanded frequency.
When the sleep mode timer expires and the drive is stopped in sleep mode, a theoretical output frequency is calculated based upon the reference signal. When the theoretical output frequency rises above the frequency set in parameter 405, Wake-up Frequency, the drive will restart the motor and ramp up to the commanded reference.

403 Sleep Mode Timer
Value:
0 to 300 seconds (OFF)

(SLEEP MODE TIMER)
5 OFF

Function:
This parameter enables the drive to stop the motor if the load on the system is minimal. The timer starts when the output frequency drops below the frequency set in parameter 404, Sleep Frequency. When the time set has passed, the drive will stop. The drive will restart when the theoretical output frequency exceeds the frequency set in parameter
405, Wake-up Frequency.
Description of choice:
Select OFF if this function is not wanted.
Set the amount of time that the drive must run at or below the sleep frequency before it stops and “goes to sleep.”

For closed loop operation, it may be useful to “over satisfy” the system before putting the drive into sleep mode. The boost setpoint parameter provides for this. After the sleep mode timer expires, the drive will reset the set point based on the value in parameter 406, Boost Setpoint.
Once this new setpoint is satisfied, the drive enters sleep mode. A setting of 100% in parameter 406, Boost Setpoint, indicates no setpoint boost. Boost setpoint is only active in Closed Loop, selected in parameter 100, Configuration.

404 Sleep Frequency (SLEEP FREQUENCY)
Value:
0.0 to parameter 405, Wake-up Frequency
5 0.0 Hz
Function:
When the output frequency falls below this set value, the timer set in parameter 403, Sleep Mode Timer, will start. The drive’s speed will follow the reference signal until the timer times out.
Description of choice:
Choose the output frequency at which the drive will activate the sleep mode timer. It is generally best to set SLEEP FREQUENCY equal to the minimum frequency set in parameter 201, Output Frequency Low Limit and parameter 204, Minimum Reference. This is because the sleep mode isn’t active until after the drive output frequency equals the sleep frequency. If the sleep frequency is less than the minimums, the sleep mode cannot activate.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
62

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

405 Wake-up Frequency (WAKEUP FREQUENCY)
Value:
Parameter 404 to parameter 202, Maximum Frequency
5 60 Hz
Function:
When the theoretical output frequency exceeds the preset value, the drive restarts the motor.
Description of choice:
Set the required frequency.
406 Boost Setpoint
Value:
0 to 200 %

(BOOST SETPOINT)
5 100 % of setpoint

Function:
This function can only be used if Closed Loop has been selected in parameter 100, Configuration.
In some systems, it may advantageous to increase the set point of the system before the drive stops the motor. This extends the time that the drive will be stopped and reduces cycling of the motor.
Description of choice:
Set the required Boost Setpoint as a percentage of the resulting reference under normal operation. 100% corresponds to the boost.
407 Switching Frequency
(SWITCHING FREQ.)
Value:
Depends on the current rating of the unit.
Function:
The value of this parameter determines the maximum switching frequency of the inverter. If Fixed Switching Frequency has been selected in parameter 408, Interference Reduction Method, this will be the fixed inverter switching frequency. Changing the switching frequency may reduce audible noise from the motor. The output frequency of the drive can never be a greater than 1/10 of the switching frequency.
Description of choice:
When the motor is running, the switching frequency may be adjusted by parameter 407, Switching Frequency, until the sound level is as low as possible.
Switching frequencies higher than 4.5 kHz will result in automatic derating of the maximum continuous output current of the drive. The derate is linear from 4.5 kHz to the maximum switching frequency of the drive. At maximum switching frequency, the continuous output current from the drive will be limited to 60% of the rated current. To avoid possible problems at high load when using a high switching frequency, it may be desirable to select Automatic Switching Frequency Modulation in parameter 408, below.

! CAUTION
Switching frequencies higher than 4.5 kHz automatically derate maximum continuous output of drive.

408

Interference Reduction Method
(NOISE REDUCTION)

Value:
5 ASFM (ASFM)
[0]
Fixed switching freq. (FIXED SWITCHING FREQ.) [1]
LC filter fitted (LC-FILTER CONNECTED)
[2]
Function:
Used to select different methods for reducing the amount of audible noise from the motor.
Description of choice:
ASFM (Automatic Switching Frequency Modulation) uses the maximum switching frequency possible while providing the output required by the load. The load is automatically monitored and the switching frequency set accordingly. The maximum switching frequency is set in parameter 407, Switching Frequency.
Fixed Switching Frequency makes it possible to set a fixed switching frequency. The switching frequency is set in parameter 407, Switching
Frequency.
LC-filter fitted is to be used if an LC filter is installed between the drive and the motor. This prevents excessive heating of the LC filter.
409

Function in Case of No Load
(FUNCT. LOW CURR.)

Value:
Trip (TRIP)
5 Warning (WARNING)

[0]
[1]

Function:
This parameter can be used for monitoring the V-belt of a fan or other power transmission component to make sure it has not broken. This function is activated when the output current goes below the current level set in parameter 221, Warning: Low Current. This function is not active during a start until the drive has reached the speed reference. It is also not active while the drive is stopped or while it is decelerating to a stop.
Description of choice:
In the case of a Trip, the drive will stop the motor if the output current drops below the value set in parameter 221.
If Warning is selected, the drive will give a warning if the output current drops below the value set in parameter 221.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

63

410

Function at Input Phase Loss
(MAINS FAILURE)

Value:
Trip (TRIP)
5 [0]
Autoderate & Warning (AUTODERATE & WARNING) [1]
Warning (WARNING)
[2]
Function:
This determines the action of the drive when one of the incoming power phases is lost. Some action is required to control the level of ripple voltage on the DC bus to avoid damage to the DC bus capacitors.
Description of choice:
At Trip, the drive stops the motor within a few seconds (depending on drive size).
If Autoderate & Warning is selected, the drive will export a warning and reduce the output current to 30% of maximum current to maintain operation. ! CAUTION
If Warning is selected, life expectancy of drive will be reduced when input phase loss persists.

At Warning, only a warning will be exported when an input phase loss occurs, but in severe cases, other extreme conditions might result in a trip. Drive display will show MAINS PHASE LOSS.

411

Function at Drive Overtemperature
(FUNCT. OVERTEMP)

Value:
Trip (TRIP)
5 [0]
Autoderate & Warning (AUTODERATE & WARNING) [1]
Function:
Select the function to be activated when the drive is exposed to an overtemperature condition.
Description of choice:
At Trip, the drive stops the motor and exports an alarm.
At Autoderate & Warning, the drive first reduces the switching frequency to minimize internal loss. If the overtemperature condition persists, the drive reduces the output current until the heat sink temperature stabilizes. A warning is issued when the function is active.
For drives with software version 2.0 or later, select Autoderate &
Warning. Set parameter 412, Trip Delay Overcurrent, to OFF.
412

Trip Delay Overcurrent
(OVERLOAD DELAY)

Value:
OFF or 0 to 60 sec.

5 60 sec.

Function:
When the output current has reached the current limit set in parameter
215, Current Limit, and remains there for the time selected in this parameter, the drive will trip.
Description of choice:
Select how long the drive will run in current limit before it trips.

For drives with software version 2.0 or later, select Autoderate &
Warning. Set parameter 412, Trip Delay Overcurrent, to OFF.

! CAUTION
At phase loss, the cooling fan of NEMA 12 drives cannot be powered. To avoid overheating, external power supply can be connected. Contact
Danfoss Graham for further information.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
64

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Feedback Signals in Open Loop

415

In some drives, feedback signals and feedback parameters are only used in closed loop operation. In the VLT 6000, the feedback signals are also active in open loop operation. Although they don’t effect the speed of the drive, they can be displayed on the drive’s meters.
Parameters 227 and 228 can set high and low limits for the feedback signals, which can activate warnings.
For open or closed loop operation, the feedback signal is scaled in parameters 413 and 414 Minimum and Maximum Feedback, and the unit displayed is chosen in parameter 415, Process Units.
413

Minimum Feedback
(MIN. FEEDBACK)

Value:
-999,999.999 to Maximum Feedback, Parameter 414

5 0.000

Function:
Parameters 413 Minimum Feedback and 414 Maximum Feedback, are used to scale the feedback signal.
Description of choice:
Set the value to be shown on the display when the feedback signal is at its minimum value.
414

Value:
5

No unit
%
rpm ppm pulse/s l/s l/min l/h kg/s kg/min kg/h m3/s m3/min m3/h m/s mbar bar
Pa
kPa m wg kW [0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]

°C
GPM
gal/s gal/min gal/h lb/s lb/min lb/h CFM ft3/s ft3/min ft3/h ft/s in wg ft wg
PSI
lb/in2
HP
°F

[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[36]
[37]
[38]
[39]

Function:
Selects the unit shown on the feedback display.

Maximum Feedback
(MAX. FEEDBACK)

Value:
Minimum Feedback to 999,999.999

Units Relating to Closed Loop
(REF. / FDBK. UNIT)

5 100.000

Function:
See the description of parameter 413, Minimum Feedback.
Description of choice:
Set the value to be shown on the display when the feedback signal is at its maximum value.

The selected unit is used if Reference [unit] or Feedback [unit] has been selected in one of the parameters 007 through 010, as well as in the Display Mode. It will be the unit for Minimum/Maximum Feedback.
In Closed Loop, the unit is also used as the unit for Minimum/Maximum
Reference and Minimum/Maximum Feedback, as well as Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2.
Description of choice:
Select the unit for the reference/feedback signal.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

65

PID for Process Regulation

Reference (Setpoint)

The built-in proportional, integral, derivative (PID) controller in the drive maintains a constant condition (pressure, temperature, flow, etc.) in the system. It adjusts motor speed based upon a reference and/or setpoint and the feedback signal. The PID controller is activated by setting parameter 100, Configuration, to Closed loop.

In parameter 205, Maximum Reference, the maximum value of the sum of all reference signals is set.

A transmitter supplies the PID controller with a feedback signal from the process to indicate its current state. The type of feedback signal in use depends upon the type of process.

The reference range cannot exceed the feedback range.

This means that deviations that occur between the reference/setpoint and the actual process state are sensed. Such deviations are compensated for by the PID regulator by adjusting the output frequency as required by the difference (or error) between the reference/setpoint and the feedback signal.
The PID controller in the drive has been designed for use in HVAC applications and to perform a number of specialized functions.
Previously, it was necessary for a building management system to handle these special functions by installing extra modules to program the system.
With the VLT 6000, there is no need for extra modules to be installed.
Only the reference and/or setpoint and a selected feedback signal need to be programmed. An advanced feature of the VLT 6000 is the drive’s ability to accept two feedback signals, making two-zone regulation possible. Voltage drop in long control cables can be compensated for by using the scaling parameters for the analog inputs.

Feedback
The feedback signal must be connected to the drive according to the table below, depending on the type of feedback signal and the settings of the associated parameters listed.
Feedback type
Pulse
Voltage

Terminal
33
53 or 54

Parameters
307
308, 309, 310 or
311, 312, 313
Current
60
314, 315, 316
Bus feedback 1*
68 and 69
537
Bus feedback 2*
68 and 69
538
* The bus feedbacks can only be set by serial communication.
If two analog feedback signals are to be used, they both must be voltage signals.
The Minimum Feedback and Maximum Feedback, parameters 413 and 414, must be set for the feedback signals. The type of process unit for the signals is selected in parameter 415, Process Units.

66

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

The Minimum Reference, set in parameter 204, indicates the smallest value that the resulting reference can assume.

If multiple Preset References are required, use multiple setups or set them in parameters 211 to 214 Preset Reference. See Reference
Handling.
If a current signal is used as a feedback signal, voltage can be used as an analog reference. Use the table below to decide which terminal to use and which parameters to program.
Reference type
Pulse
Voltage

Terminal
17 or 29
53 or 54

Parameters
301 or 305
308, 309, 310 or
311, 312, 313
314, 315, 316
211, 212, 213, 214
418, 419

Current
60
Preset reference
Setpoints
Bus reference *
68 and 69
* The bus reference can only be set by serial communication.
Terminals that are not used should be set to No function.

Inverse Regulation
Normal regulation means that the motor speed increases when the reference/setpoint is higher than the feedback signal. Inverse regulation means that the motor speed decreases when the reference/setpoint is higher than the feedback signal. If there is a need for inverse regulation, inverse must be programmed in parameter 420, PID
Normal/Inverse Control.

Anti-windup
The process controller is factory set with an active anti-windup function.
This function ensures that when either a frequency limit or a current limit is reached, the integrator will be reset to zero. If the frequency limit or current limit is cleared, the integrator will turn on again. This function can be disabled in parameter 421, PID Anti-windup.

Start-up Conditions
In some applications, the optimum setting of the process regulator takes a long time to reach. In such cases, a start-up frequency can be entered in parameter 422, PID Start-up Frequency. The drive will ramp directly to this frequency before PID control begins. This avoids control by deviation between the reference/setpoint and the actual state of the process during acceleration. It also avoids overshoot of the process requirement during acceleration due to lag in the feedback signal. Differentiator Gain Limit

PID Overview

The differentiation control reacts to the rate of change of the error between the setpoint and the feedback signal. This is seldom needed for HVAC applications. If the differentiation function becomes too dominant, the differentiation factor can be limited. This is done in parameter 426, PID Differentiator Gain Limit.

The block diagram below shows reference and setpoint in relation to the feedback signal.

Lowpass Filter
Noise on the feedback signal can be reduced by using the built-in lowpass filter. Set a suitable lowpass filter time constant. This time constant determines the cutoff frequency of the filter.
If the lowpass filter has been set to 0.1s, the cut-off frequency will be 10
RAD/sec., corresponding to (10/2 x π) = 1.6 Hz. This means that any noise on the feedback signal whose frequency is greater than 1.6 Hz will be filtered out. Choose a suitable time constant in parameter 427,
PID Lowpass Filter Time.

Optimization of the Process Regulator
The basic settings have now been made; all that remains to be done is to optimize the proportional gain, the integration time and, if needed, the differentiation time. These are set by parameters 423, 424 and 425. In most processes, this can be done by following the guidelines below.

As can be seen, the remote reference is added to Setpoint 1 or
Setpoint 2. The setpoint that is active depends on the value of parameter 417, Feedback Function.

1.
2.

Feedback Handling

3.

4.

Start the motor.
Set parameter 423, PID Proportional Gain, to 0.3 and increase it until the feedback signal becomes unstable. Then reduce the value until the feedback signal has stabilized. Now lower the proportional gain by about half (40% to 60%).
Set parameter 424, PID Integration Time, to 20 seconds and reduce the value until the feedback signal becomes unstable.
Increase the integration time until the feedback signal stabilizes.
Now increase the integration time from 15% to 50%.
Parameter 425, PID Differentiation Time, is only used in very fast-acting systems and should be left off for most HVAC applications. When it is used, the typical value is 1/4th the value set in parameter 424, PID Integration Time. The differentiator should only be used when the setting of the proportional gain and the integration time have been fully optimized.

Starting and stopping the drive will produce the necessary error signal in the process to set the PID.

Handling of the feedback signal(s) can be seen from the block diagram on the next page. The block diagram shows how and by which parameters the feedback handling is affected.
Feedback signals can be voltage, current, pulse and bus feedback signals. In two zone feedback systems, both feedback signals must be voltage signals (terminals 53 and 54). Please note that Feedback 1 consists of bus feedback 1, (parameter 537) added to the feedback signal value of terminal 53. Feedback 2 consists of bus feedback 2,
(parameter 538) added to the feedback signal value of terminal 54.
In addition, the drive has an internal calculator capable of converting a pressure signal into a “linear flow” feedback signal. This function is activated in parameter 416, Feedback Conversion.
The parameters for feedback handling are active both in closed and open loop modes. In open loop, the feedback signal can be displayed on one of the drive’s meters and the drive can produce warnings if the feedback signal is beyond the range set in parameters 227, Warning:
Low Feedback and 228, Warning: High Feedback.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

67

Feedback Handling (continued)
During closed loop operation, there are three ways to use the PID controller and setpoint and feedback signals:
1 setpoint and 1 feedback
1 setpoint and 2 feedbacks
2 setpoints and 2 feedbacks

1 Setpoint and 2 Feedbacks
Depending on the feedback function selected in parameter 417,
Feedback Function, the two feedback signals will be compared to the setpoint. A description of the individual feedback functions is given in parameter 417. As above, parameter 418, Setpoint 1, will be added to the remote reference, if a remote reference is used.

1 Setpoint and 1 Feedback

2 Setpoints and 2 Feedbacks

In HVAC applications it is often possible to place a pressure or temperature sensor at the farthest significant load and measure actual pressure or temperature in the system. In these cases, the drive's PID controller can respond to system changes, as programmed. When only one setpoint and one feedback signal are used, the drive responds to the feedback signal to match the programmed setpoint in parameter
418, Setpoint 1. (If a remote reference is used, it will be added to the setpoint.) Whenever two critical zones do not have the same setpoint value, two feedback with two setpoint control is required. Many pumping systems require the monitoring and control of two loads that differ in size and pressure drop. Or this can be effective when controlling different temperature zones in cooling or heating applications. Parameter 418,
Setpoint 1, is the setpoint for zone 1. Feedback for zone 1 is the feedback signal at terminal 53. Parameter 419, Setpoint 2, is the setpoint for zone 2 and terminal 54 for feedback 2. Bus Feedback 1 and 2 (parameters 535 and 536) are added to their respective feedback signals, when serial bus data is added to the zone control.
Parameter 417, Feedback Function, selects whether the drive will attempt to have both feedback signals meet the minimum (2 zone min.) or maximum (2 zone max.) to their respective setpoints.

68

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

416

Feedback Conversion
(FEEDBACK CONV.)

Value:
5 Linear (LINEAR)
Square root (SQUARE ROOT)

[0]
[1]

Function:
In this parameter, a function is selected which converts a feedback signal from the process to a feedback value that equals the square root of the connected signal.
This can be used where regulation of a flow is required and the feedback is from a pressure sensor (flow is proportional to the square root of pressure). This conversion makes it possible to set the reference in such a way that there is a linear connection between the reference and the flow required. See diagram below.
Feedback conversion should not be used if two-zone regulation has been selected in parameter 417, Feedback Function.
Description:
If Linear is selected, the feedback signal and the feedback value will be proportional. If Square root is selected, the drive first takes the square root of the feedback signal.

Function:
This parameter determines the calculation method for two feedback signals. Terminals 53 and 54 are both read in selections [0] through
[6]. In each case, if only one feedback signal is received, a zero value will be calculated for the inactive terminal. To read feedback from only one of the two terminals, use Feedback 1 Only (terminal 53) or
Feedback 2 Only (terminal 54) to exclude the inactive terminal.
Feedback 1 = Sum of parameter 535, Bus Feedback 1, (if present) and the feedback signal value of terminal 53.
Feedback 2 = Sum of parameter 536, Bus Feedback 2, (if present) and the feedback signal value of terminal 54.
Description of choice:
If Minimum is selected, the drive will compare Feedback 1 with
Feedback 2 and regulate on the basis of the lower feedback value.
If Maximum is selected, the drive will compare Feedback 1 with
Feedback 2 and regulate on the basis of the higher feedback value.
If Sum is selected, the drive will total Feedback 1 with Feedback 2.
If Difference is selected, the drive will subtract Feedback 1 from
Feedback 2.
If Average is selected, the drive will calculate the average of Feedback
1 and Feedback 2.
If 2-zone Minimum is selected, the drive will calculate the difference between Setpoint 1 and Feedback 1 as well as Setpoint 2 and
Feedback 2. The drive will regulate its output speed based on the larger difference. A positive difference, (a setpoint higher than the feedback), is always larger than a negative difference.
If 2-zone Maximum is selected, the drive will calculate the difference between Setpoint 1 and Feedback 1 as well as Setpoint 2 and
Feedback 2. After the calculation, the drive will use the smaller difference. A negative difference (a setpoint lower than the feedback) is always smaller than a positive difference.

417

If Feedback 1 Only is selected, terminal 53 is read as the feedback signal and terminal 54 ignored. Feedback 1 is compared to Setpoint 1 for drive control.

Feedback Function
(2 FEEDBACK, CALC.)

Value:
Minimum (MINIMUM)
5 Maximum (MAXIMUM)
Sum (SUM)
Difference (DIFFERENCE)
Average (AVERAGE)
Two-zone minimum (2 ZONE MIN)
Two-zone maximum (2 ZONE MAX)
Feedback 1 only (FEEDBACK 1 ONLY)
Feedback 2 only (FEEDBACK 2 ONLY)

[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]

If Feedback 2 Only is selected, terminal 54 is read as the feedback signal and terminal 53 ignored. Feedback 2 is compared to Setpoint 2 for drive control.
NOTE
Value of parameter 418, Setpoint 1, is added to any remote reference when Minimum ,
Maximum , Sum, Difference or Average is selected. ✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

69

418

Setpoint 1
(SETPOINT 1)

Value:
Feedback Minimum to Feedback Maximum

421

5 0.000

Function:
Setpoint 1 is used to provide the setpoint reference for PID control with one feedback signal. It is also used for the setpoint for zone one in two-setpoint PID control. External and preset references may be added to its value.
In open loop, Setpoint 1 should be set to 0 to prevent parameter 417,
Feedback Function, from affecting the reference.
See description of parameter 417, Feedback Function.
Description of choice:
Set the desired value within the programmed minimum and maximum.
The process unit is selected in parameter 415, Process Units.

Value:
Off (DISABLE)
[0]
5 On (ENABLE)
[1]
Function:
It is possible to choose whether the PID controller integrator is to continue to sum the error signal when it is not possible to increase or decrease the output frequency to correct the error.
Used in Closed Loop, parameter 100.
Description of choice:
The factory setting is On, which means that the error integrator is cleared if either the current limit, the voltage limit or the maximum or minimum frequency has been reached. The integrator will not function again until regulation is possible. Select Off if the integrator is to continue integrating even if it is not possible to correct the error.
422

419

Setpoint 2
(SETPOINT 2)

Value:
Feedback minimum to Feedback maximum

5 0.000

Function:
Setpoint 2 is used to provide the setpoint reference for zone two in two-zone PID. In open loop, Setpoint 2 should be set to 0, to prevent parameter 417, Feedback Function, from affecting the reference.
See description of parameter 417.
Description of choice:
Set the required value. The process unit is selected in parameter 415,
Process Units.
420

PID Normal/Inverse Control
(PID NOR/INV. CTRL)

Value:
5 Normal (NORMAL)
[0]
Inverse (INVERSE)
[1]
Function:
This determines how the drive’s PID controller responds to an error between the setpoint and feedback.
Used in Closed Loop, (parameter 100).

PID Anti-windup
(PID ANTI WINDUP)

PID Start-up Frequency
(PID START VALUE)

Value:
Minimum frequency to maximum frequency
(set by parameters 201 and 202)

5 0 Hz

Function:
Each time the drive is given a start command, the start-up frequency is the speed the drive accelerates to before PID control is activated. The drive will follow the acceleration ramp when a start signal is received as if in open loop. When the programmed start-up frequency is reached, it will change to closed loop operation.
Used in Closed Loop, parameter 100.
Description of choice:
Set the required start frequency. For software versions prior to 2.0, do not set this frequency between 0.1 and 7.7 Hz.

! CAUTION
If drive is running in current limit before desired start frequency is obtained, PID control will not be activated. To avoid this, start frequency must be low enough to ensure drive does not go into current limit. This can be done during operation.

Description of choice:
Select normal when the drive is to reduce the output frequency as the feedback signal increases.
Select inverse when the drive is to increase the output frequency as the feedback signal increases.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
70

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

423

PID Proportional Gain
(PID PROP. GAIN)

Value:
0.00 to 10.00

426

5 0.30

Function:
The proportional gain determines how fast the system responds to a change in feedback.
Used in Closed Loop, parameter 100.
Description of choice:
Quick regulation is obtained by a high gain, but, if the gain is too high, the process may become unstable. See Optimization of the Process
Regulator for information on proper adjustment.
424

PID Integral Time
(PID INTEGR.TIME)

Value:
0.01 to 9999.00 sec. (OFF)

Function:
The integrator adds the error signal over time and uses this to correct the speed of the drive.
The integral time is the time needed by the integrator to have the same effect as the proportional gain.
Used in Closed Loop parameter 100.
Description of choice:
Fast regulation is obtained by setting a short integration time. However, if this time is too short, the process will overcorrect and become unstable. See Optimization of the Process Regulator for information on proper adjustment.
425

PID Differentiation Time
(PID DIFF. TIME)

Value:
0.00 (OFF) to 10.00 sec.

Value:
5.0 to 50.0

5 5.0

Function:
When the differentiator is used, fast changes in the error can sometimes cause unstable operation. In these cases it may be useful to limit the contribution of the differentiator.
Used in Closed Loop, parameter 100.
Description of choice:
A lower limit will improve stability, but will reduce the effect of the differential. 427

5 OFF

PID Differentiator Gain Limit
(PID DIFF. GAIN)

PID Lowpass Filter Time
(PID FILTER TIME)

Value:
0.01 to 10.00

5 0.01

Function:
Noise on the feedback signal can be reduced by the lowpass filter.
Used in Closed Loop, parameter 100.
Description of choice:
Select the desired time constant (t).
The cut off frequency equals ½πt. For example, if a time constant of 0.1 s is programmed, the cut off frequency for the lowpass filter will be
1/[2π (.1)] = 1.6 Hz.
The PID controller will then only respond to changes in the feedback signal whose frequency is less than 1.6
Hz.

5 OFF

Function:
The differentiator responds to the rate of change of the error signal.
The quicker the error changes, the greater the response from the differentiator. Used in Closed Loop, parameter 100.
Description of choice:
Fast regulation can be obtained by means of a long differentiation time.
If this time is too long, the process may overshoot. The differentiator is generally set of OFF in HVAC applications. See Optimization of the
Process Regulator for information on proper adjustment.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

71

Serial Communication for FC Protocol

ADDRESS 31

ADDRESS 1
MASTER

REPEATER

ADDRESS 2
ADDRESS 126

Protocols
All VLT 6000 drives have an RS-485 port which allows controlling the drive by one of three different serial communication protocols. The three protocols, which can be selected in parameter 500, Protocol, are: q q q

Johnson Controls Metasys N2®
Siemens FLN®
Danfoss FC protocol

Metasys N2 is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls.
FLN is a registered trademark of Siemens.

If Danfoss FC protocol is to be selected, set parameter 500, Protocol to
FC protocol .
For further information on operating the drive through N2 or FLN communication, request the N2 or FLN Operator’s Manual from
Danfoss Graham.

72

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Packet Communication
Control and Reply Packets
The packet communication in a master/slave system is controlled by the master. The drives are the slaves. A maximum of 31 VLT 6000 drives can be connected to one master unless a repeater is used. If a repeater is used, a maximum of 126 drives can be connected to one master. The master continuously sends packets addressed to the slaves and awaits reply packets from them. The response time of the slaves is a maximum of 50 ms.
Only a slave that has received a faultless packet addressed to that slave will respond by sending a reply packet.

Broadcast
When a master sends a packet to all slaves connected to the bus at the same time, it is called a broadcast. In broadcast communication, if the packet has been correctly received, the slaves do not send reply packets to the master.

Contents of a Character (byte)

STX

Each transferred character begins with a start bit. Subsequently, eight data-bits are transferred, corresponding to one byte. Each character is sent with a parity bit to produce even parity (i.e., an even number of binary 1’s in the eight data-bits and the parity bit combined). A character ends with a stop bit and therefore consists of a total of eleven bits. LGE ADR

DATA

BCC

= Time between characters

Packet Length (LGE)
The packet length is the number of data bytes plus address byte ADR plus data control byte BCC.

Start bit 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Even Stop
Parity Bit

Packet Buildup with FC Protocol
Each packet begins with a start character (STX) = 02 Hex, followed by a byte that gives the packet length (LGE) and a byte that gives the drive address (ADR). Next a number of data bytes is sent. The size of the packet is variable, depending upon the packet type. The packet ends with a data control byte (BCC).
------

Packets with four data bytes have a length of:
LGE = 4 + 1 + 1 = 6 bytes
Packets with twelve data bytes have a length of:
LGE = 12 + 1 + 1 = 14 bytes
Packets that contain text have a length of 10+n bytes. Ten is the fixed characters, while ‘n’ is variable, depending on the length of the text.

Drive Address (ADR)
Two different address formats are used in which the address range of the drive is either from 1 through 31 or from 1 through 126.
1.

Address format 1-31

-----STX

LGE ADR

Data

BCC

Packet Times

7

The speed of communication between a master and a slave depends on the baud rate. The baud rate of the drive must be the same as the baud rate of the master. Select the baud rate of the drive in parameter
502, Baud Rate.
After a reply packet from the slave, there must be a minimum pause of two characters (22 bits) before the master is able to send another packet. At a baud rate of 9600 baud, there must be a minimum pause of 2.3 msec. After the master has completed the packet, the response time of the slave back to the master is a maximum 20 msec., with a minimum pause of two characters.

Master packet Pause time The byte for this address range has the following profile:

Pause time, minimum:
Response time, minimum:
Response time, maximum:

5

4

3

2

1

0

0

Bit 7 = 0 (address format 1 through 31 active)
Bit 6 is not used
Bit 5 = 1: Broadcast, address bits (0 through 4), not used
Bit 5 = 0: No Broadcast
Bit 0 through 4 = Drive address 1 through 31

Slave packet Response time 6

Pause time 2 characters
2 characters
20 msec.

The time between individual characters in a packet is not to exceed two characters, and the packet must be completed within 1.5 times the rated packet time. If the baud rate is 9600 and the packet length is 16 baud, the packet must be completed within 27.5 msec.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

73

1. Address format 1 through 126
The byte for the 1 through 126 address range has the following profile: 7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Data Character (byte)
The buildup of data blocks depends on the type of packet. There are three types of packets. The packet type applies to both control packets
(master→slave) and reply packets (slave→master).
The three types of packets are the following:

1

1.

Bit 7 = 1 (address format 1 through 126 active)
Bit 0 through 6 = Drive address 1 through 126

Parameter block, used for transferring parameters between master and slave. The data block has 12 bytes (6 words) and also contains the process block.
PKE

Bit 0 through 6 = 0 Broadcast
The slave sends the address byte back to the master in the reply packet in unchanged form.

A packet is sent to drive address 22 using address format 1 through
31:

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

PCD2

Process block

Process block, built up as a data block with four bytes (two words), covering:
Control word and reference value
(from master to slave)
Status word and present output frequency
(from slave to master).

0

0

PWEHIGH PWELOW PCD1

Parameter block

2.

Example:

IND

0

PCD 1

PCD 2

Process block

Data Control Byte (BCC)

3.

The data control byte can be explained by means of an example:
Before the first byte of the packet is received, the calculated check sum
(BCS) is 0.
7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

After the first byte (02H) has been received:
BCS = BCC EXOR “first byte”
(EXOR = exclusive-or gate)
BCS
=00000000
EXOR
“first byte”
BCC

= 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 (02H)
=00000010

Each additional, subsequent byte is gated with BCS EXOR and results in a new BCC, such as:
BCS
=00000010
EXOR
“second byte”
BCC

74

= 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 (D6H)
=11010100

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Text block, used for reading or writing texts via the data block.
PKE

IND Ch 1 Ch2
Text block

Ch n PCD1

PCD2

Process block

1. Parameter Bytes
PKE

IND

PWE HIGH PWELOW

If the command cannot be carried out, the slave will send this reply
(0111) Command cannot be executed and give the following error message in the parameter value (PWE):
(reply 0111)

Error message

0

The parameter number used does not exist

1

There is no write access to the parameter called

2

The data value exceeds the parameter limits

3

The used sub-index does not exist

4

The parameter is not of the array type

5

The data type does not match the parameter called

PNU

AK

Parameter number Not in use

Parameter commands and replies

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Parameter commands and replies (AK)
Bits no. 12-15 are used for transferring parameter commands from master to slave and the slave's processed reply back to the master.

Parameter Commands Master→Slave:

Bit no.
15 14 13 12

17

Data change in the parameter called is not possible in the present mode of the drive. Some parameters can only be changed when the motor has stopped

130

There is no bus access to the parameter called

131

Data change is not possible because factory setup has been selected

Parameter command

0

0

0

0

No command

0

0

0

1

Read parameter value

0

0

1

0

Write parameter value in RAM
(word)

0

0

1

1

Write parameter value in RAM
(double word)

1

1

0

1

Write parameter value in RAM and EEPROM (double word)

1

1

1

0

Write parameter value in RAM and EEPROM (word)

1

1

1

1

Read/write text

Reply slave→master:

Bit no.
15 14 13 12 Reply
0

0

0

0

No reply

0

0

0

1

Parameter value transferred (word)

0

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

Index
PKE

IND

PWE HIGH

PWE LOW

Index is used together with the parameter number for read/write access to parameters with an index, such as parameter 615, Error Code.
Index has 2 bytes - a lowbyte and a highbyte. However, only the lowbyte is used. See the example on the following page.

Command cannot be executed

1

Bits no. 0-10 are used for transmitting parameter numbers. The function of a given parameter can be seen from the parameter description in the programming section.

Parameter value transferred
(double word)

0

Parameter Number (PNU)

Text transferred

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

75

Example - Index:

For a read command, the index must have the following format:

The first error code (index [1]) in parameter 615, Error code, must be read. 04

PKE = 1267 Hex (read parameter 615, Error Code).

Highbyte Lowbyte
IND

IND = 0001 Hex - Index no. 1.
1267 H
PKE

0001 H
IND

PWE

The drive will respond in the parameter value (PWE) block by means of an error code with a value from 1 through 99. See List of Warnings and Alarms to identify the error code.

The drive has two parameters for which a text can be written. These are parameters 533 and 534, Display Text. See the description in the parameter section of this manual. In order to write a text via the PWE block, the parameter command (AK) must be set to 'F' Hex.
For a write command, the index must have the following format:

Parameter Value (PWE)
PKE

IND

05
PWE HIGH

PWE LOW

The parameter value block consists of 2 words (4 bytes). Its value depends on the command given (AK). If the master inquires about a parameter value, the PWE block contains no value.
If a parameter value is to be changed by the master (write), the new value is entered in the PWE block and sent to the slave.
If the slave responds to a parameter requirement (read command), the present parameter value is transferred in the PWE block and returned to the master.
If a parameter does not contain a numerical value, but several data selection options, for example parameter 001, Language, where [0] is
English and [4] is Spanish, the data value is selected by writing the value in the PWE block. See the example on the following page.
Through serial communication, it is only possible to read parameters with data type 9 (text string). In VLT 6000 drives, parameters 621 through 631, Nameplate Data are data type 9. For example, it is possible in parameter 621, Unit Type, to read the unit size and input voltage range.
When a text string is transferred (read), the packet length is variable, since the texts have different lengths. The packet length is stated in the
2nd byte of the packet, called LGE.
In order to read a text via the PWE block, the parameter command
(AK) must be set to ‘F’ Hex.
The index character is used to indicate whether the command in question is a read or write command.

76

00 H

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

00 H

Highbyte Lowbyte
IND

The following data types are supported by the drive:
Data type
3
4
5
6
7
9

Description
Integer 16
Integer 32
Unsigned 8
Unsigned 16
Unsigned 32
Text string

Unsigned means there is no sign included in the packet.

Example - Write a parameter value:

Example - Read a parameter value:

Parameter 202, Output Frequency, High Limit, is to be changed to 100
Hz. This value must be remembered after a power failure, so it is written in EEPROM.

The value in parameter 206, Ramp Up Time, is required. The master sends the following inquiry:
PKE

= 10CE Hex - read parameter 206, Ramp Up Time
= 0000 Hex

PKE

= E0CA Hex - Write to parameter 202, Output Frequency,
High Limit

IND

IND

= 0000 Hex

PWEHIGH = 0000 Hex

PWEHIGH = 0000 Hex

PWELOW = 0000 Hex

PWELOW = 03E8 Hex - Data value 1000, corresponding to 100 Hz, see Conversion.

PKE

0000 H
IND

0000 H
PWE HIGH

03E8 H
PWELOW

0000 H

PKE

E0CA H

10CE H

IND

PKE

0000 H

0000 H
PWE HIGH

PWE HIGH

PWE LOW

IND

0000 H

000A H

PWE HIGH

PWE LOW

03E8 H

IND

0000 H

PKE

10CA H

0000 H

If the value in parameter 206, Ramp Up Time, is 10 seconds, the reply from the slave to the master will be as follows:

10CE H

The reply from the slave to the master will be:

0000 H

PWELOW

Example - Choice of a Data Value: kW is to be selected in parameter 415, Process Units. This value must be remembered after a power failure, so it is written in EEPROM.

PKE

= E19F Hex - Write to parameter 415, Process Units

IND

= 0000 Hex

PWEHIGH = 0000 Hex
PWELOW = 0014 Hex - Choose data choice kW [20]

E19F H

0000 H

0000 H

0014 H

PKE

IND

PWE HIGH

PWELOW

The reply from the slave to the master will be:
119F H
PKE

0000 H
IND

0000 H

0014 H

PWE HIGH

PWELOW

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

77

Conversion
The different attributes for each parameter can be seen in the section on factory settings.
Since a parameter value can only be transferred as a whole number, a conversion factor must be used to transfer decimals.
Example:
Parameter 201: Minimum Frequency, conversion factor 0.1. If parameter 201 is to be set to 10 Hz, a value of 100 must be transferred, since a conversion factor of 0.1 means that the transferred value will be multiplied by 0.1. A value of 100 will, therefore, be understood as 10.0.

Index
74
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4

Factor
3.6
100.0
10.0
1.0
0.1
0.01
0.001
0.0001

Conversion Table

Process word
The process word block is divided into two blocks each of 16 bits, which always come in the sequence stated.
Control packet
(master➝slave)
PCD1

PCD2

Reply packet
(slave➝master)

Control Word per FC Protocol
The control word is used for transmitting commands from a master
(PC) to a slave (drive).
Master➝Slave

Control word Serial com. ref. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15

78

Bit = 0

DC braking
Coasting stop
Quick stop
Freeze output frequency
Ramp stop

No function
Data not valid

Bit =1
Preset ref. lsb
Preset ref. msb

Start
Reset
Jog
No function
Data valid
Activate relay 1
Activate relay 2
Choice of setup lsb
Choice of setup msb
Reversing

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

PCD1
Control word

PCD2
Reference value

Status word

Given output frequency

Bit 00/01:
Bits 00 and 01 are used for choosing between the four pre-programmed references parameters 211 through 214, Preset Reference, as shown in the table below.
Preset Reference
1
2
3
4

Parameter
211
212
213
214

Bit 01
0
0
1
1

Bit 00
0
1
0
1

NOTE
Parameter 508, Choice of Preset Reference, is used to choose how bits 00/01 are to be gated with the corresponding functions of the digital inputs. Bit 02, DC BRAKE:
Bit 02 = 0 enables DC braking. Set braking current and duration in parameter 114, DC Braking Current, and in parameter 115, DC
Braking Time.
NOTE
Parameter 504, DC Brake, is used for selecting how bit 02 is to be gated with the corresponding function of terminal 27.

Bit 03, Coasting Stop:
Bit 03 = 0 means that the drive will coast to a stop.
Bit 03 = 1 means that the drive is able to start the motor, provided the other conditions for starting are fulfilled.
NOTE
In parameter 503, Coasting Stop, the choice is made of how bit 03 is to be gated with the corresponding function of terminal 27.

Bit 10, Data Not Valid/Data Valid:
Used for telling the drive whether the control is to be used or ignored.
Bit 10 = 0 means that the control word is ignored.
Bit 10 = 1 means that the control word is used. This function is relevant because the control word is always contained in the packet, regardless of the type of packet used. Therefore it is possible to disconnect the control word if it is not to be used in connection with updating or reading of parameters.

Bit 04, Quick Stop:
Bit 04 = 0 leads to a stop in which the motor speed is ramped down to a stop as set in parameter 207, Ramp Down Time.

Bit 11, Relay 1:
Bit 11 = 0 Relay 1 is not activated.
Bit 11 = 1 Relay 1 is activated, provided Control Word Bits 11/12 has been selected in parameter 323, Relay Outputs.

Bit 05, Freeze Output Frequency:
Bit 05 = 0 means that the given output frequency is frozen. The frozen output frequency can now only be changed with the digital inputs programmed for Speed Up and Speed Down.

Bit 12, Relay 2:
Bit 12 = 0 Relay 2 is not activated.
Bit 12 = 1 Relay 2 is activated, provided Control Word Bits 11/12 has been selected in parameter 326, Relay Outputs.

NOTE
If Freeze Output is active, drive cannot be stopped via Bit 06, Start, or through terminal
18. Drive can only be stopped in following ways: q Bit 03, Coasting Stop q Terminal 27 q Bit 02, DC Braking q Terminal 19 programmed for DC Braking
Bit 06, Ramp Stop/Start:
Bit 06 = 0 leads to a stop in which the motor speed is ramped down to stop through parameter 207, Ramp Down Time.
Bit 06 = 1 means that the drive is able to start the motor, provided the other conditions for starting are fulfilled.
NOTE
Parameter 505, Start, determines how bit 06,
Ramp Stop/Start, is gated and corresponding function of terminal 18.
Bit 07, Reset:
Bit 07 = 0 leads to no reset.
Bit 07 = 1 means that a trip is reset.
Reset is activated on the leading edge of the signal, at the time the signal changes from logic 0 to logic 1.
Bit 08, Jog:
Bit 08 = 1 means that the output frequency is determined by parameter
209, Jog Frequency.

NOTE
If time-out period set in parameter 556, Bus Time
Interval Function, is exceeded, relays 1 and 2 will have voltage removed if activated via serial communication. Bits 13/14, Choice of Setup:
Bits 13 and 14 are used to choose among the four menu setups in accordance with the following table:
Setup
Bit 14
Bit 13
1
0
0
2
0
1
3
1
0
4
1
1
This function is only possible if Multi-setup has been selected in parameter 004.
NOTE
In parameter 507, Choice of Setup, a choice is made of how bits 13/14 are gated with corresponding function of digital inputs.

Bit 15, No function/reversing:
Bit 15 = 0 leads to no reversing
Bit 15 = 1 leads to reversing
In the factory setting, reversing has been selected as digital in parameter 506, Reversing. Bit 15 will only allow reversing, if bus or logic or has been selected, or logic and has been selected and a signal is present at terminal 19.

Bit 09, No function:
Bit 09 has no function.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

79

Status Word per FC Protocol
The status word is used to inform the master (e.g., a PC) of the condition of the slave (drive).
Slave➝Master

Status word Output frequency 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13

Bit = 0
Trip

No trip
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
No warning
Speed reference
Local operation
Out of frequency range
No function

14
15

Bit =1
Control ready
Drive ready
Stand by
Trip

Warning
Speed = reference
Serial comm. control
Running
No function
Voltage warning high/low Current limit
Thermal warning

Bit 00, Control Ready:
Bit 00 = 1 The drive is ready for operation.
Bit 00 = 0 The drive has tripped.
Bit 01, Drive Ready:
Bit 01 = 1 The drive is ready for operation, but terminal 27 is a logic 0 and/or a coasting command has been received via serial communication. Bit 02, Standby:
Bit 02 = 1 The drive is able to start the motor when a start command is given.

Bit 03, No Trip/Trip:
Bit 03 = 0 means that the drive is not in an error state.
Bit 03 = 1 means that the drive has tripped and needs a reset signal in order for operation to be resumed.
Bit 04, Not in use:
Bit 04 is not used in the status word.
Bit 05, Not in use:
Bit 05 is not used in the status word.

80

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Bit 06, Not in use:
Bit 06 is not used in the status word.
Bit 07, No warning/warning:
Bit 07 = 0 means there is no warning.
Bit 07 = 1 means a warning has occurred.
Bit 08, Speed ≠ Reference/Speed = Reference:
Bit 08 = 0 means that the motor is running, but that the present speed is different from the preset speed reference. This may be the case when the speed is being ramped up or down after a start or stop command.
Bit 08 = 1 means that the present motor speed equals the preset speed reference. Bit 09, Local Operation/Serial Communication Control:
Bit 09 = 0 means that OFF/STOP has been activated on the control unit, or that the drive is in Hand mode. It is not possible to control the drive through serial communication.
Bit 09 = 1 means that it is possible to control the drive through serial communication. Bit 10, Out of Frequency Range:
Bit 10 = 0 if the output frequency is outside the range established by the values in parameter 201, Output Frequency Low Limit, and parameter
202, Output Frequency High Limit.
Bit 10 = 1 means that the output frequency is within the limits of those parameters. Bit 11, Not Running/Running:
Bit 11 = 0 means that there is no output from the drive.
Bit 11 = 1 means that the drive has a start signal, or that the output frequency is greater than 0 Hz.
Bit 12, No Function:
Bit 12 has no function.
Bit 13, Voltage Warning High/Low:
Bit 13 = 0 means that there is no voltage warning.
Bit 13 = 1 means that the DC voltage of the drive intermediate circuit is too low or too high.
Bit 14, Current Limit:
Bit 14 = 0 means that the output current is less than or equal to the value in parameter 215, Current Limit.
Bit 14 = 1 means that the output current is higher than the value in parameter 215, Current Limit, and the drive will trip after the time set in parameter 412, Trip Delay Overcurrent, has passed if the output current is not reduced.
Bit 15, Thermal Warning:
Bit 15 = 0 means there is no thermal warning.
Bit 15 = 1 means that the temperature limit has been exceeded either in the motor, in the drive or from a thermistor connected to an analog input. Serial Communication Reference

Present Output Frequency

Master➝Slave

Slave➝Master

Control word Serial com. ref. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

The serial communication reference is transmitted to the drive in the form of a 16-bit word. The value is transmitted as whole numbers
0 through ±32767 (±200 %).
16384 (4000 Hex) corresponds to 100 %.
The serial communication reference has the following format:
0 through 16384 (4000 Hex) - 0 through 100% (parameter 204,
Minimum Reference - Par. 205, Maximum Reference).
It is possible to change the direction of rotation through the serial reference. This is done by converting the binary reference value to 2's complement. See example in next column.

Status word Output frequency 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
The value of the output frequency of the drive at any given time is transmitted as a 16-bit word. The value is transmitted in the form of whole numbers 0 through ±32767 (±200%).
16384 (4000 Hex) corresponds to 100%.
The output frequency has the following format:
0 through 16384 (4000 Hex) @ 0 to 100% (Parameter 201,
Output Frequency Low limit - Parameter 202, Output Frequency
High Limit).
Example - Status Word and Present Output Frequency:
The master receives a status message from the drive that the present output frequency is 50% of the output frequency range.

Example - Control word and serial communication reference:

Parameter 201, Output Frequency Low Limit = 0 Hz

The drive must receive a start command, and the reference is to be set to 50% (2000 Hex) of the reference range.

Parameter 202, Output Frequency High Limit = 60 Hz

Control word =
Reference =

047F Hex. Start command
2000 Hex. 50 % reference

047F H

2000 H

Control word Reference

The drive is to receive a start command, and the reference is to be set to -50% (-2000 Hex) of the reference range.
The reference value is first converted to the first complement; then 1 binary is added to get 2’s complement:

Status word = 0F03 Hex. Status message
Output frequency = 2000 Hex. 50% of the frequency range, corresponding to 30 Hz.
0F03 H
Status word

2000 H
Output
frequency

2000 Hex= 0010 0000 0000 0000 binary
1´ complement
= 1101 1111 1111 1111 binary
+ 1 binary
2´ complement
= 1110 0000 0000 0000 binary
Control word =
Reference =

047F Hex. Start command
E000 Hex. -50 % reference

047F H

E0000 H

Control word Reference

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

81

Serial Communication
Parameters 500 through 566
This parameter group sets up the drive for serial communication.
There is a choice of three protocols: FC (VLT protocol), Johnson
Controls Metasys N2 and Siemens FLN. In order to use serial communication to control the drive, address and baud rate must always be set. In addition to controlling the drive, operational data from the drive including reference, feedback, motor temperature and others can be read through serial communication.
500

Protocol
(PROTOCOL)

Value:
5 FC protocol (FC PROTOCOL)
Metasys N2 (METASYS N2)
Landis & Staefa FLN (FLN)
Function:
There is a choice of three different protocols.

[0]
[1]
[2]

Description of choice:
Select the required control word protocol.
501

Address
(ADDRESS)

Value:
Parameter 500 Protocol = FC protocol
0 through 126
51
Parameter 500 Protocol = Metasys N2
1 through 255
1
Parameter 500 Protocol = FLN
0 through 98
1
Function:
In this parameter it is possible to allocate an address in a serial communication network to each drive.
Description of choice:
The individual drive must be given a unique address. If the number of drives exceeds 31, a repeater must be used. Parameter 501, Address, cannot be chosen via serial communication but is set via the keypad.
502

Baud Rate
(BAUDRATE)

Value:
300 Baud (300 BAUD)
[0]
600 Baud (600 BAUD)
[1]
1200 Baud (1200 BAUD)
[2]
2400 Baud (2400 BAUD)
[3]
4800 Baud (4800 BAUD)
[4]
5 9600 Baud (9600 BAUD)
[5]
Function:
In this parameter, the speed at which data is transmitted via serial communication is programmed. Baud rate is defined as the number of bits transmitted per second.

Description of choice:
The transmission speed of the drive must be set at a value that corresponds to the transmission speed of the master. Parameter 502,
Baud Rate, cannot be selected through serial communication; it must be set by the keypad. The data transmission time itself, which is determined by the baud rate selected, is only part of the total communication time.
503

Coasting Stop
(COASTING)

Value:
Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT)
[0]
Serial communication (SERIAL PORT)
[1]
Logic and (LOGIC AND)
[2]
5 Logic or (LOGIC OR)
[3]
Function:
In parameters 503 through 508, a choice can be made to control the drive via the digital inputs and/or by serial communication.
If Digital input is selected, the command can only be carried out through digital input.
If Serial communication is selected, the command can only be carried out through serial communication.
If Logic and is selected, the command must be by both serial communication and a digital input.
If Logic or is selected, the command can be made by either digital or serial communication.
Description of choice:
The tables below show whether the motor is running or coasting when
Digital Input, Serial Communication, Logic and or Logic or has been selected. NOTE
Terminal 27 and bit 03 of control word are active when logic 0 is selected.
Digital Input
Serial
Term. 27 Comm.
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Logic and
Serial
Term. 27 Comm.
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1

Function
Coasting
Coasting
Motor run
Motor run

Serial Communication
Serial
Term. 27 Comm. Function
0
0
Coasting
0
1
Motor run
1
0
Coasting
1
1
Motor run

Function
Coasting
Motor run
Motor run
Motor run

Logic or
Serial
Term. 27 Comm.
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
82

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Function
Coasting
Coasting
Coasting
Motor run

504

DC Brake
(DC BRAKE)

505

Value:
Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT)
Serial communication (SERIAL PORT)
Logic and (LOGIC AND)
5 Logic or (LOGIC OR)

[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]

Start
(START)

Value:
Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT)
Serial communication (SERIAL PORT)
Logic and (LOGIC AND)
5 Logic or (LOGIC OR)

[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]

Function:
See the functional description under parameter 503, Coasting Stop.

Function:
See the functional description under parameter 503, Coasting Stop.

Description of choice:
The table below shows when the motor is running and is DC-braking when Digital input, Serial communication, Logic and or Logic or has been selected.

Description of choice:
The table below shows when the motor has stopped and gives the situations in which the drive has a start command when Digital input,
Serial communication, Logic and or Logic or has been selected.

NOTE
DC braking inverse, through terminals 19 and
27, and bit 03 of the control word, is active when logic 0 is selected.

Term.
19/27
0
0
1
1

Digital Input
Serial
Comm.
0
1
0
1

Term.
19/27
0
0
1
1

Logic and
Serial
Comm.
0
1
0
1

Function
DC brake
DC brake
Motor run
Motor run

Serial Communication
Term.
Serial
19/27 Comm. Function
0
0
DC brake
0
1
Motor run
1
0
DC brake
1
1
Motor run

Function
DC brake
Motor run
Motor run
Motor run

Term.
19/27
0
0
1
1

Logic or
Serial
Comm.
0
1
0
1

Function
DC brake
DC brake
DC brake
Motor run

Digital Input
Serial
Term. 18 Comm. Function
0
0
Stop
0
1
Stop
1
0
Start
1
1
Start

Serial Communication
Serial
Term. 18 Comm. Function
0
0
Stop
0
1
Start
1
0
Stop
1
1
Stop

Logic and
Serial
Term. 18 Comm. Function
0
0
Stop
0
1
Stop
1
0
Stop
1
1
Start

Logic or
Serial
Term. 18 Comm.
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1

Function
Stop
Start
Start
Start

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

83

506

Reversing
(REVERSING)

Value:
5 Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT)
Serial communication (SERIAL PORT)
Logic and (LOGIC AND)
Logic or (LOGIC OR)

[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]

Function:
See the functional description under parameter, 503 Coasting Stop.
Description of choice:
The table below shows when the motor is running forward and reverse when Digital input, Serial communication, Logic and or Logic or has been selected.
Digital Input
Serial
Term. 19 Comm.
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Logic and
Serial
Term. 19 Comm.
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
507
508

Function
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Reverse

Serial Communication
Serial
Term. 19 Comm. Function
0
0
Forward
0
1
Forward
1
0
Forward
1
1
Reverse

Function
Forward
Forward
Forward
Start

Logic or
Serial
Term. 19 Comm.
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1

Function
Forward
Reverse
Reverse
Reverse

Selection of Setup
(SELECTING OF SETUP)
Selection of Preset Reference
(SELECTING OF SPEED)

Value:
Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT)
Serial communication (SERIAL PORT)
Logic and (LOGIC AND)
5 Logic or (LOGIC OR)

[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]

Function:
See the functional description for parameters 507 and 508 under parameter 503, Coasting Stop.
Description of choice:
The table below shows the Setup (parameter 002 Active Setup) that has been selected via Digital input, Serial communication, Logic and or
Logic or. The table also shows the preset reference (parameters 211 through 214, Preset reference) that has been selected via Digital input, Serial communication, Logic and or Logic or.

Bus
Msb
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Bus
Lsb
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

Digital Input
Setup/Preset Setup/Preset
Setup No.
Msb
Lsb
Preset Ref. No.
0
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
3
1
1
4
0
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
3
1
1
4
0
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
3
1
1
3
0
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
3
1
1
4

Bus
Msb
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Bus
Lsb
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

Serial Communication
Setup/Preset Setup/Preset
Setup No.
Msb
Lsb
Preset Ref. No.
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
2
0
1
2
1
0
2
1
1
2
0
0
3
0
1
3
1
0
3
1
1
3
0
0
4
0
1
4
1
0
4
1
1
4

Bus
Msb
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Bus
Lsb
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

Logic and
Setup/Preset Setup/Preset
Setup No.
Msb
Lsb
Preset Ref. No.
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
1
1
1
2
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
3
1
1
3
0
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
3
1
1
4

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
84

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Bus
Msb
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Bus
Lsb
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

Logic or
Setup/Preset Setup/Preset
Setup No.
Msb
Lsb
Preset Ref. No.
0
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
3
1
1
4
0
0
2
0
1
4
1
0
2
1
1
3
0
0
3
0
1
4
1
0
3
1
1
4
0
0
4
0
1
4
1
0
4
1
1
4

509 through 532, 537
Value:
Parameter
No.
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
*****
537

Data Read-out

Description

Display Text

Unit

Resulting reference
Resulting reference [unit]
Feedback [unit]
Frequency [Hz]
User-defined readout
Motor current [A]
Power [kW]
Power [HP]
Motor voltage [V]
DC link voltage [V]
Thermal load, motor [%]
Thermal load, VLT [%]
Digital input
Terminal 53, analog input [V]
Terminal 54, analog input [V]
Terminal 60, analog input [mA]
Pulse reference [Hz]
External reference [%]
Status word
Heat sink temperature [°C]
Alarm word
Control word
Warning word
Extended status word
*****
Relay status

(REFERENCE %)
(REFERENCE [UNIT])
(FEEDBACK)
(FREQUENCY)
(CUSTOM READOUT)
(CURRENT)
(POWER KW)
(POWER HP)
(MOTOR VOLT)
(DC LINK VOLTAGE)
(MOTOR TEMPERATURE)
(VLT TEMPERATURE)
(DIGITAL INPUT)
(TERMINAL 53, ANALOG INPUT)
(TERMINAL 54, ANALOG INPUT)
(TERMINAL 60, ANALOG INPUT)
(PULSE REFERENCE)
(EXTERNAL REFERENCE)
(STATUS WORD HEX)
(HEAT SINK TEMP.)
(ALARM WORD, HEX)
(VLT CONTROL WORD, HEX)
(WARNING WORD)
(STATUS WORD)
*****
(RELAY STATUS)

%
Hz, rpm
Par. 415
Hz
Hz x scaling
Amp
kW
HP
VAC
VDC
%
%
Binary
Volt
Volt mA Hz
%
Hex
°C
Hex
Hex
Hex
Hex
*****
Binary

Updating
Interval
80 msec.
80 msec.
80 msec.
80 msec.
80 msec.
80 msec.
80 msec.
80 msec.
80 msec.
80 msec.
80 msec.
80 msec.
80 msec.
20 msec.
20 msec.
20 msec.
20 msec.
20 msec.
20 msec.
1.2 sec.
20 msec.
2 msec.
20 msec.
20 msec.
*****
20 msec.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

85

Function:
These parameters are read-only through the serial communication port. To display drive functions on the drive display, see parameters
007 through 010, Display Readout.
Description of choice:
Resulting Reference, parameter 509 gives a percentage for the resulting reference in the range from Minimum Reference to Maximum reference. See also Reference Handling.
Resulting reference [unit], parameter 510 gives the resulting reference by means of the unit Hz in Open Loop, parameter 100. In Closed
Loop, the reference unit is selected in parameter 415, Units with Closed
Loop.
Feedback [unit], parameter 511, gives the resulting feedback value by means of the unit/scaling selected in parameters 413, 414 and 415.
See also Feedback Handling.
Frequency [Hz], parameter 512, gives the output frequency of the drive. User Defined Read Out, parameter 513, gives a user defined value calculated on the basis of the present output frequency and unit, as well as the scaling in selected in parameter 005, Maximum Value of User
Defined Read Out. The unit is selected in parameter 006, Unit for
User Defined Read Out.

Terminal 54, Analog Input [V], parameter 523, gives the voltage value of the signal on terminal 54.
Terminal 60, Analog Input [mA], parameter 524, gives the current value of the signal on terminal 60.
Pulse Reference [Hz], parameter 525, gives a pulse frequency in Hz connected to one of the terminals 17 and 29.
External Reference [%], parameter 526, gives the sum of external references as a percentage (sum of analog/pulse/serial communication) in the range from minimum reference to maximum reference.
Status Word, parameter 527, gives the present status word of the drive in hex.
Heat Sink Temperature [°C], parameter 528, gives the present heat sink temperature of the drive.
Alarm Word, parameter 529, gives a hex code for the alarm on the drive. Control Word, parameter 530, gives the present control word of the drive in hex.
Warning Word, parameter 531, indicates in hex warnings from the drive. Motor Current [A], parameter 514, gives the motor current in A.

Extended Status Word, parameter 532, indicates in hex code whether there is a warning from the drive.

Power [kW], parameter 515, gives the present power provided to the motor in kW.

Relay Status, parameter 537, indicates in binary code the status of relays 1 through 6.

Power [HP], parameter 516, gives the present power provided to the motor in HP.
Motor Voltage [V], parameter 517, gives the voltage fed to the motor.
DC Link Voltage [V], parameter 518, gives the intermediate circuit voltage of the drive.
Thermal Load, Motor [%], parameter 519, gives the calculated/ estimated thermal load on the motor. 100% is the trip point. See also parameter 117, Motor Thermal Protection.
Thermal Protection, VLT [%], parameter 520, gives the calculated/ estimated thermal load on the drive. 100% is the trip point.

533

Display Text 1
(DISPLAY TEXT ARRAY 1)

Value:
Text up to 20 characters can be written for display on line 1 (top line) of the LCP display using serial communication input. Parameter 008,
Small Display Readout 1.1, must be set for LCP Display Text.
Function:
Write the desired text.
534

Display Text 2
(DISPLAY TEXT ARRAY 2)

Digital Input, parameter 521, gives the signal status of the 8 inputs (16,
17, 18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and 33). Input 16 corresponds to the bit to the extreme left. 0 = no signal, 1 = signal connected.

Value:
Text up to 8 characters can be written for display on line 2 (large text display) of the LCP display using serial communication input.
Parameter 007, Large Display Readout, must be set for LCP Display
Text.

Terminal 53, Analog Input [V], parameter 522, gives the voltage value of the signal on terminal 53.

Function:
Write the desired text.

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
86

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

535

Bus Feedback 1
(BUS FEEDBACK1)

Value:
0 through 16384 decimal (0 through 4000 Hex)

556

50

Function:
Via the serial communication port, this parameter allows writing of a bus feedback value which will then form part of the feedback handling. Bus
Feedback 1 will be added to any feedback value registered on terminal
53.
Description of choice:
Write the required bus feedback value via serial communication.
536

Bus Feedback 2
(BUS FEEDBACK 2)

Value:
0 through 16384 decimal (0 through 4000 Hex)

50

Function:
Via serial communication, a bus feedback value can be written in this parameter that will become part of the feedback handling system. Bus
Feedback 2 will be added to any feedback value on terminal 54.
Description of choice:
Write the required bus feedback value via the serial communication.
537

Relay Status
(RELAY STATUS)

Value: binary (0 = open, 1 = closed)

50

Description of choice:
See Data Read-out for parameters 509 through 532, 537 on previous page for relay status description.
NOTE
Parameters 555, Bus Time Interval, and 556, Bus
Time Interval Function, are only active when
FC Protocol has been selected in parameter
500, Protocol.
555

Bus Time Interval Function
(BUS TIME INTERVAL FUNCTION)

Value:
5 Off (NO FUNCTION)
Freeze output (FREEZE OUTPUT)
Stop (STOP)
Jogging (JOG FREQUENCY)
Max. output frequency (MAX FREQUENCY)
Stop and trip (STOP AND TRIP)

[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]

Function:
In this parameter, the required reaction from the drive is selected when the time set in parameter 555, Bus Time Interval, has been exceeded.
Description of choice:
The output frequency of the drive can be frozen at the present value, frozen as selected in parameter 211, Preset Reference 1, frozen as selected in parameter 202, Maximum Output Frequency, or stop and show a fault.
560

N2 override release time
(N2 OVER.REL.TIME)

Value:
1 - 65533 sec.
5 OFF
Function
The maximum time is set between the receipt of two N2 messages. If the time is exceeded, serial communication is assumed stopped. All N2 points which are overridden will be released in the following order:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Analog outputs
Binary outputs
Internal floating points
Internal integer points
Internal byte points

N2 point addresses are released in numerical order beginning with 1
(or 0).
Description of choice:
Set the required time.

Bus Time Interval
(BUS TIME INTERVAL)

Value:
1 to 99 sec.

5 60 sec.

Function:
In this parameter, the maximum time allowed between the receipt of two packets in a row is set. If this time is exceeded, the serial communication is assumed to have stopped and the choice made in parameter 556,
Bus Time Interval Function, will be carried out.
Description of choice:
Set the required time.
✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

87

565

FLN bus time interval
(FLN TIME INTER.)

Value:
1 - 65534 sec.
5 60 sec.
Function
The maximum time is set between the receipt of two FLN messages. If the time is exceeded, serial communication is assumed stopped and the required reaction is set in parameter 566, FLN Bus Time Interval
Function.
Description of choice:
Set the required time.
566

FLN bus time interval function
(FLN TIME FUNCT.)

Value:
5 Off (NO FUNCTION)
[0]
Freeze output (FREEZE OUTPUT)
[1]
Stop (STOP)
[2]
Jogging (JOG FREQUENCY)
[3]
Max. output frequency (MAX.SPEED)
[4]
Stop and trip (STOP AND TRIP)
[5]
Function
The required reaction from the adjustable frequency drive is selected when the time set in parameter 565, FLN Bus Time Interval, has been exceeded. Description of choice:
The output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive can be frozen at the present value at any given time, frozen at parameter 211, Preset
Reference 1, frozen at parameter 202, Max. Output Frequency, or stop output and show a fault.

88

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Warning Words, Extended Status Word and
Alarm Word
Warning Word, Extended Status Word and Alarm Word are shown in hex format on the display. If there is more than one warning or alarm, the sum of the warnings or alarms will be shown.
The descriptions of the Extended Status Words, Warning Words and
Alarm Words can be read out via the serial bus in parameter 531,
Warning Word; 532, Extended Status Word; and 529, Alarm Word.
Hex Code
00000001
00000002
00000004
00000008
00000010
00000020
00000040
00000080
00000100
00000200
00000400
00000800
00001000
00002000
00004000
00008000
00010000
00020000
00040000
00080000
00100000
00200000
00400000
00800000
01000000
02000000
04000000
08000000
10000000
20000000
40000000
80000000

Extended Status Word (Paramater 532)
Autoramping
Start delay
Sleep boost active
Sleep mode active
Automatic motor adaptation completed
Automatic motor adaptation running
Reverse start (not for VLT 6000)
Normal ramping
Reversing
At reference
Running
Local reference = 0, Remote = 1
OFF = 1
Hand = 1, Auto = 0
Run request
No run permission
Freeze output frequency
Freeze output blocked
Jogging
No jog permission
Stand by
Stopped
DC braking stop
Drive ready
Relay 123 active (Profibus only)
Drive ready
Control ready
Start prevented
Profibus OFF3 active
Profibus OFF2 active
Profibus OFF1 active
Reserved

Hex Code
00000001
00000002
00000004
00000008
00000010
00000020
00000040
00000080
00000100
00000200
00000400
00000800
00001000
00002000
00004000
00008000
00010000
00020000
00040000
00080000
00100000
00200000
00400000
00800000
01000000
02000000
04000000
08000000
10000000
20000000
40000000
80000000

Warning Word (Parameter 531)
Reference high
Control card fault
Power card fault
HPFB bus timeout
RS-485 timeout
Overcurrent
Current limit
Motor thermistor
Motor overtemperature
Inverter overtemperature
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Voltage warning low
Voltage warning high
Input phase fault
Live zero fault
Under 10 Volt (terminal 50)
Reference low
Feedback high
Feedback low
Output current high
Out of frequency range66666
Profibus communication fault
Output current low
Output frequency high
Output frequency low
AMA - motor too small
AMA - motor too big
AMA - check par. 102, 103, or 105
AMA - check par. 102, 104, or 106
Reserved
Reserved

Hex Code
00000001
00000002
00000004
00000008
00000010
00000020
00000040
00000080
00000100
00000200
00000400
00000800
00001000
00002000
00004000
00008000
00010000
00020000
00040000
00080000
00100000
00200000
00400000
00800000
01000000
02000000
04000000
08000000
10000000

Alarm Word (Parameter 529)
Unknown fault
Trip locked
AMA fault
HPFB fault
RS-485 timeout
Short circuit
SMPS fault
Ground fault
Overcurrent
Current limit
Motor thermistor
Motor thermal
Inverter thermal
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Input phase loss
Live zero fault
Heat sink overtemperature
Motor phase W missing
Motor phase V missing
Motor phase U missing
Profibus communication fault
Inverter fault
Output current low
External fault
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

89

Service Functions
Parameters 600 through 631

Parameter 602, kWh Counter

This parameter group contains functions useful for troubleshooting the drive including operating data, data log and fault log.

Shows the output power of the drive. The calculation is based on the mean value in kWh over one hour. This value can be reset using parameter 618, Reset of kWh Counter.

It also has information on the nameplate data of the drive.

Parameter 603 Number of Power Ups.

Function:
These parameters can be read out through the serial communication port as well as on the control panel display.

Shows the number of times power has been applied to the drive.

Description of choice:
Parameter 600, Operating Hours
Shows the number of hours the drive has had power applied. The value is saved every hour and when the power is removed. This value cannot be reset.
Parameter 601, Hours Run

Parameter 604, Number of Overtemperature Trips
Shows the number of overtemperature trips from the heatsink temperature sensor on the drive.
Parameter 605, Number of Overvoltage Trips
Shows the number of overvoltage trips from the sensor of DC link voltage of the drive. The count is only taken when Alarm 7 Overvoltage is activated.

Shows the number of hours the drive has powered the motor. This parameter can be reset in parameter 619, Reset of Hours Run
Counter. The value is saved every hour and when the power is removed. 600-605 Operating Data Value:
Value:
Parameter
Description
Number
Operating Data:
600
Operating Hours
601
Hours Run
602
kWh Counter
603
Number of Power-ups
604
Number of Overtemp Trips
605
Number of Overvoltage Trips

90

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Display
Text
(OPERATING HOURS)
(RUNNING HOURS)
(KWH COUNTER)
(POWER UPS)
(OVER TEMPS)
(OVER VOLTS)

Unit

Range

Hours
0 through 130,000.0
Hours
0 through 130,000.0 kWh Occurences
0 through 9999
Occurences
0 through 9999
Occurences
0 through 9999

606 - 614 Data Log
Value:
Parameter no. 606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614

Description
Data log:
Digital Input
Control Word
Status Word
Reference
Feedback
Output Frequency
Output Voltage
Output Current
DC Link Voltage

Display
Text
(LOG: DIGITAL INP)
(LOG: BUS COMMAND)
(LOG: BUS STAT WD)
(LOG: REFERENCE)
(LOG: FEEDBACK)
(LOG: MOTOR FREQ.)
(LOG: MOTOR VOLT)
(LOG: MOTOR CURR.)
(LOG: DC LINK VOLT)

Function:
With these parameters, it is possible to see up to twenty saved values, or data logs. Data log [1] is the most recent and [20] the oldest log.
When a start command has been given, a new entry to the data log is made every 160 ms. If there is a trip or if the drive is stopped, the 20 latest data log entries will be saved and the values will be visible in the display. This is useful to view the operation of the drive just before a trip. These values will be lost if power is removed from the drive.
The drawing below shows a display. The data log number is shown in the square brackets at the left of the forth line of the display.

EXT. REFERENCE, %

63.0 %

SETUP

1

606 DATALOG: DIGITAL INP

[1] 40

Unit

Range

Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
%
Par. 414
Hz
Volt
Amp
Volt

0 through 255
0 through 65535
0 through 65535
0 through 100
-999,999.999 through 999,999.999
0.0 through 999.9
50 through 1000
0.0 through 999.9
0.0 through 999.9

The table can be used for converting a decimal number into a binary code. For example, digital 40 corresponds to binary 00101000. The nearest smaller decimal number is 32, corresponding to a signal on terminal 18. 40-32 = 8, corresponds to the signal on terminal 27.
Terminal
16 17 18 19 27 29 32 33
Decimal number 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Parameter 607 Data Log: Control Word:
This is where the latest log data is given in decimal code for the control word of the drive. The control word can only be changed via serial communication. The control word is read as a decimal number which is to be converted into hex. See the control word profile under the section
Serial communications.
Parameter 608, Data Log: Status Word:
This gives the latest log data in decimal code for the status word. The status word is read as a decimal number which is to be converted into hex. See the status word profile under the section Serial communication.

Data logs [1] through [20] can be read by first pressing CHANGE
DATA, followed by the + and - keys to change data log numbers.

Parameter 609, Data Log: Reference:
This gives the latest log data for the resulting reference.

Parameters 606 through 614, Data Log, can also be read out via the serial communication port.

Parameter 610, Data Log: Feedback:
This gives the latest log data for the feedback signal.

Description of choice:
Parameter 606 Data Log: Digital Input:
This is where the latest log data is shown in decimal code, representing the status of the digital inputs. Translated into binary code, terminal 16 corresponds to the bit to the extreme left and to decimal code 128.
Terminal 33 corresponds to the bit to the extreme right and to decimal code 1.

Parameter 611, Data Log: Output Frequency:
This gives the latest log data for the output frequency.
Parameter 612, Data Log: Output Voltage:
This gives the latest log data for the output voltage.
Parameter 613, Data Log: Output Current:
This gives the latest log data for the output current.
Parameter 614, Data Log: DC Link Voltage:
This gives the latest log data for the intermediate circuit voltage.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

91

615

Fault Log: Error Code
(F. LOG: ERROR CODE)

Value:
[Index 1-10]

618

Error Code: 0 - 99

Function:
This parameter makes it possible to see the reason why a fault trip occurs. Ten log values, indicated as [1] through [10] are stored.
The lowest log number [1] contains the most recently saved data value; the highest log number [10] contains the oldest data value.
If there is a fault trip, it is possible to see its cause, the time and possibly the values or output current or output voltage. See the section on
Warnings and Alarms for a table explaining the error codes.
Description of choice:
The fault log is only reset after manual initialization.
616

Value:
5 No reset (DO NOT RESET)
Reset (RESET COUNTER)

Hours: 0 - 130,000.0

Function:
This parameter makes it possible to see the total number of hours run in connection with the 10 most recent fault trips. Ten log values, indicated as [1] through [10] are stored.

Function:
Reset to zero of parameter 602, kWh Counter.
Description of choice:
If Reset has been selected and the OK key is pressed, the kWh counter of the drive is reset. This parameter cannot be selected via the serial port. 619

Description of choice:
The fault log is only reset after manual initialization.
Fault Log: Value
(F. LOG: VALUE)

Value:
[Index 1 - 10]

Reset of Hours Run Counter
(RESET RUN. HOUR)

Value: 0 - 9999

[0]
[1]

Function:
Reset to zero of parameter 601, Hours Run.
Description of choice:
If Reset has been selected and the OK key is pressed, parameter 601
Hours-run is reset to zero. This parameter cannot be selected via the serial port.
620

The lowest log number [1] contains the most recently saved data value: the highest log number [10] contains the oldest data value.

617

[0]
[1]

Value:
5 No reset (DO NOT RESET)
Reset (RESET COUNTER)

Fault Log: Time
(F. LOG: TIME)

Value:
[Index 1-10]

Reset of kWh Counter
(RESET KWH COUNT)

Operating Mode
(OPERATION MODE)

Value:
5 Normal function (NORMAL OPERATION)
Function with deactivated inverter
(OPER. W/INVERT.DISAB)
Control card test (CONTROL CARD TEST)
Initialization (INITIALIZE)

[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]

Function:
In addition to its normal function, this parameter can be used for two different tests.

Function:
This parameter makes it possible to see the value at which a fault trip occurred. The unit of the value depends on the alarm active in parameter 615, Fault Log: Error Code.

It is possible to reset to the default factory settings for all Setups, except parameters 500, Address; 501 Baud Rate; 600-605, Operating Data; and 615-617, Fault Log.

Description of choice:
The fault log is only reset after manual initialization.

Description of choice:
Normal function is used for normal operation of the motor.
Function with deactivated inverter is selected to operate the control card using its control signals without running the motor.
Control card test is used to test the analog and digital inputs, analog and digital outputs, relay output and the power supplies of the control card. ✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
92

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

A test connector with the connections shown below is required for this test. Initialization is selected to reset the drive to its factory default settings without resetting parameters 501 Address, 502 Baud Rate; 600-605,
Operating Data; and 615-617, Fault Log.

Set test connector set up as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

! CAUTION

Connect 4, 16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and 33.
Connect 5 and 12.
Connect 39, 20 and 55.
Connect 42 and 60.
Connect 45, 53 and 54

Choosing Initialization resets drive to read-only memory default parameter values. This erases any special programming which may have been done to drive. It may be preferable to use parameter 004 to download all parameters from local control panel (LCP).
Initialization the drive to factory default settings in accordance with the following procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select Initialization.
Press OK key.
Remove input power and wait for light in display to go out.
Connect input power.
Initialization of all parameters will be carried out in all Setups with exception of parameters 501, Address; 502, Baud Rate;
600-605, Operating Data; and 615-617, Fault Log.

Test the control card in accordance with the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Select Control Card Test.
Remove input power and wait for light in display to go out.
Insert test connector described above.
Reconnect input power.
Press OK key. (Test cannot run without control panel in place.)
Drive automatically tests control card.
Remove test connector and press OK key when drive displays
“TEST COMPLETED.”
8. Parameter 620, Operating Mode, is automatically set to Normal
Function.

If the control card test fails, the drive will display “TEST FAILED.”
Replace the control card.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

93

621 - 631 Nameplate
Value:
Parameter
Number
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631

Description
Nameplate:
Unit Type
Power Component
VLT Ordering No.
Software Version No.
Control Panel Identification No.
Database Identification No.
Power Component Identification No.
Application Option Type
Application Option Ordering No.
Communication Option Type
Communication Option Ordering No.

Function:
Identification information for the drive can be read from parameters 621 through 631, Nameplate via the display or the serial communication port. Description of choice:
Parameter 621, Nameplate: Unit Type:
VLT type gives the unit size and input voltage. See Cross Reference Model Number to VLT Type to convert this do the drive’s model number. Parameter 622, Nameplate: Power Component:
This gives the type of power card installed in the drive.
Parameter 623, Nameplate: VLT Ordering Number:
This gives the ordering number for the specific drive. Because this number does not specify any special options or programming that was provided with the drive, it is better to refer to the serial number printed on the Danfoss Graham nameplate when contacting the factory about the drive.
Parameter 624, Nameplate: Software Version Number:
This gives the present software version number of the drive.
Parameter 625, Nameplate: LCP Identification Number:
This gives the identification number of the keypad (LCP) of the unit.

94

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Display text
(DRIVE TYPE)
(POWER SECTION)
(ORDERING NO)
(SOFTWARE VERSION)
(LCP ID NO.)
(PARAM DB ID)
(POWER UNIT DB ID)
(APPLIC. OPTION)
(APPLIC. ORDER NO)
(COM. OPTION)
(COM. ORDER NO)
Parameter 626, Nameplate: Database identification Number:
This gives the identification number of the software’s database.
Parameter 627, Nameplate: Power Component Identification
Number:
This gives the identification number of the database of the drive.
Parameter 628, Nameplate: Application Option Type:
This gives the type of application options fitted to the basic drive.
Parameter 629, Nameplate: Application Option Ordering
Number:
This gives the ordering number for the application option of the basic drive. Because this number does not specify any special options or programming that was provided with the drive, it is better to refer to the serial number printed on the Danfoss Graham nameplate when contacting the factory about the drive.
Parameter 630, Nameplate: Communication Option Type:
This gives the type of communication option card installed in the drive, if any. Parameter 631, Nameplate: Communication Option Ordering
Number:
This gives the ordering number for the communication option.

Electrical Installation of the Relay Card

Relay Card Functions
Parameters 700 through 711

The relays are connected as shown below.

Parameters 700 through 711 are only activated if a relay option card is installed in the drive. A relay card can be field installed in the drive if desired. Activation/deactivation can be programmed in parameters 701, 704,
707 and 710, Relay 6, 7, 8 and 9, ON Delay; and parameters 702,
705, 708 and 711 Relay 6, 7, 8 and 9, OFF Delay.
700 Relay 6, Function
703 Relay 7, Function
706 Relay 8, Function
709 Relay 9, Function
Function:
This output activates a relay.

Relay 6-9
A-B make, A-C break
Max. 240 VAC, 2 Amp

(RELAY6 FUNCTION)
(RELAY7 FUNCTION)
(RELAY8 FUNCTION)
(RELAY9 FUNCTION)

Relay outputs 6, 7, 8 and 9 can be used for showing status and warnings. The relay is activated when the conditions for the relevant data values have been fulfilled. Because these have the same possible functions as relay 1, see the description under parameter 323.
701 Relay 6, ON Delay
704 Relay 7, ON Delay
707 Relay 8, ON Delay
710 Relay 9, ON Delay
Value:
0 to 600 sec.

(RELAY6 ON DELAY)
(RELAY7 ON DELAY)
(RELAY8 ON DELAY)
(RELAY9 ON DELAY)
5 0 sec.

Function:
This parameter allows a delay of the activation of relays 6, 7, 8 and 9
(terminals 1, and 2).
Description of choice:
Enter the desired value.
702 Relay 6, OFF Delay
705 Relay 7, OFF Delay
708 Relay 8, OFF Delay
711 Relay 9, OFF Delay
Value:
0 to 600 sec.

(RELAY6 OFF DELAY)
(RELAY7 OFF DELAY)
(RELAY8 OFF DELAY)
(RELAY9 OFF DELAY)

To achieve double isolation, mount the plastic foil as shown below.

5 0 sec.

Function:
This parameter is used to delay the deactivation time of relays 6, 7, 8 and 9 (terminals 1 and 2).
Description of choice:
Enter the desired value.
This parameter allows a delay of the activation of relays 6, 7, 8 and 9
(terminals 1, and 2).

✭ Indicates default parameter. Depending upon the application, the drive may be delivered with other parameters selected.
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

95

Status Messages
Status messages are generated automatically and appear in the fourth
(bottom) line of the display as shown.
A. The first part of the status line indicates the CONTROL POINT of the drive.
B. The center part of the status line indicates the REFERENCE
LOCATION.
C. The last part of the status line gives the present DRIVE STATUS.
The table below defines the status massage display words.

80.0%

5.08A

2.15k
W

40.0 Hz

P1:R

P2:R

SETUP

1

P3:O

AUTO REM.
RUNNING
HAND LOCAL STOP
RAMPING
OFF
B
JOGGING
A
.
.
.
.
STAND BY
C

DISPLAY
DESRIPTION
WORD
CONTROL POINT
AUTO
The drive is in Auto mode, which means that Run/Stop control is carried out via the control terminals and/or serial communication.
HAND
The drive is in Hand mode, which means that Run/Stop control is carried out via the keys on the keypad
OFF
OFF/STOP is activated either by means of the keypad, or by the digital inputs Hand Start and Auto Start, both being a logic ‘0.’
REFERENCE LOCATION
REM.
If REMOTE has been selected, the reference is set via the control terminals or via serial communication.
LOCAL
If LOCAL has been selected, the reference is set via the [+] and [-] keys on the keypad.
DRIVE STATUS
RUNNING
The motor speed now corresponds to the resulting reference.
RAMPING
The output frequency is changing.
Parameter 208, Automatic Ramp, is enabled. The drive is attempting to
AUTO RAMP avoid a trip from overvoltage by extending its decel ramp time.
The boost function in parameter 406, Boost Setpoint, is enabled. This
SLEEP.BST
function can only be enabled in Closed Loop operation.
SLEEP

! DANGER

When in Sleep mode, motor may restart at any time without warning. The energy saving function in parameter 403, Sleep Mode Timer, is enabled.
This status message shows that at present the motor has been stopped by sleep mode. It can restart automatically.
START DEL

! DANGER

When in Start Delay mode, motor may restart at any time without warning.
A start delay time has been programmed in parameter 111, Start Delay.
When the delay has passed, the drive will start and ramp up to the reference frequency. 96

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

DISPLAY
WORD
RUN REQ.

DESRIPTION

! DANGER

When in Run Request mode, motor may restart at any time without warning.

JOG
JOG REQ.

A start command has been given, but the motor will not be started until a
Run Permission signal is received via a digital input.
Jog has been enabled via a digital input or via serial communication.

! DANGER

When in Jog Request mode, motor may restart at any time without warning.

FRZ.OUT
FRZ.REQ

A start command has been given, but the motor will remain stopped until a
Run Permission signal is received via a digital input.
The output frequency has been frozen.

! DANGER

When in Freeze Request mode, motor may restart at any time without warning.

START F/R

AMA RUN
AMA STOP

STANDBY
STOP
DC STOP
UN.READY
CTR.READY
NOT READY
START IN.
XXXX

A start command has been given, but the motor will remain stopped until a
Run Permission signal is received via a digital input.
Reversing and start on terminal 19, parameter 303, Digital Inputs, and Start on terminal 18, parameter 302, Digital Inputs, are enabled at the same time.
The motor will remain stopped until one of the signals becomes a logic ‘0.’
Automatic motor adaptation has been enabled in parameter 107, Automatic
Motor Adaptation, AMA.
Automatic motor adaptation has been completed. The drive is now ready for operation after the Reset signal has been given. Note that the motor will start after the drive has received the Reset signal.
The drive is able to start the motor when a start command is received.
The motor has been stopped via a stop signal from serial communication.
The DC brake has been enabled in parameters 114 through 116.
The drive is ready for operation, but terminal 27 is a logic ‘0’ and/or a
Coasting Command has been received via the serial communication.
This status is only active when a Profibus option card is installed.
The drive is not ready for operation, because of a trip or because OFF1,
OFF2 or OFF3 is a logic ‘0.’
This status will only be displayed if, in parameter 599, Profidrive [1] has been selected and OFF2 or OFF3 is a logic ‘0.’
The microprocessor of the control has stopped and the drive is not operating. The cause may be noise on the power line, motor leads or control wires. VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

97

Warnings and Alarms
The table below gives the drive’s warnings and alarms and indicates whether the fault trip locks the drive. After a Trip Lock Fault, the input power must be removed, the cause of the fault corrected, and input power restored to reset the drive. A Trip can be reset manually in any one of three ways.

In addition, an automatic reset may be selected in parameter 400,
Reset Function which will reset all non-trip lock faults.

Wherever an “X” is placed under both Warning and Alarm in the table below, this means that a Warning precedes the Alarm. It can also mean that it is possible to program whether a given fault is to result in a
Warning or an Alarm. This is possible, for example, through parameter
1) Pressing the keypad key RESET
117, Motor Thermal Protection. After a trip, the motor will be coasting
2) A digital input and the drive’s Alarm and Warning indications will flash. If the fault is
3) Serial communication removed, only the Alarm will flash. After a reset, the drive will be ready to start operation again.
No.
Description
Warning
Alarm
Trip Locked
1
Under 10 Volts (10 VOLT LOW)
X
2
Live zero fault (LIVE ZERO ERROR)
X
X
4
Mains failure (MAINS PHASE LOSS)
X
X
X
5
Voltage warning high (DC LINK VOLTAGE HIGH)
X
6
Voltage warning low (DC LINK VOLTAGE LOW)
X
7
Overvoltage (DC LINK OVERVOLT)
X
X
8
Undervoltage (DC LINK UNDERVOLT)
X
X
9
Inverter overloaded (INVERTER TIME)
X
X
10
Motor overloaded (MOTOR TIME)
X
X
11
Motor thermistor (MOTOR THERMISTOR)
X
X
12
Current limit (CURRENT LIMIT)
X
X
13
Overcurrent (OVERCURRENT)
X
X
14
Ground fault (EARTH FAULT)
X
X
15
Switch mode fault (SWITCH MODE FAULT)
X
X
16
Short circuit (CURR.SHORT CIRCUIT)
X
X
17
Serial communication timeout (STD BUSTIMEOUT)
X
X
18
HP field bus timeout (HPFB TIMEOUT)
X
X
19
Fault in EEPROM on power card (EE ERROR POWER)
X
20
Fault in EEPROM on control card (EE ERROR CONTROL)
X
22
Auto motor adaptation fault (AMA FAULT)
X
29
Heat-sink temperature too high (HEAT SINK OVERTEMP.)
X
X
30
Motor phase U missing (MISSING MOT.PHASE U)
X
31
Motor phase V missing (MISSING MOT.PHASE V)
X
32
Motor phase W missing (MISSING MOT.PHASE W)
X
34
HPFB communication fault (HPFB COMM. FAULT)
X
X
35
Out of frequency range (OUT FREQ RNG/ROT LIM)
X
37
Inverter fault (GATE DRIVE FAULT)
X
X
39
Check parameters 104 and 106 (CHECK P.104 & P.106)
X
40
Check parameters 103 and 105 (CHECK P.103 & P.106)
X
41
Motor too large (MOTOR TOO BIG)
X
42
Motor too small (MOTOR TOO SMALL)
X
60
Safety stop (EXTERNAL FAULT)
X
61
Output frequency low (FOUT < FLOW)
X
62
Output frequency high (FOUT > FHIGH)
X
63
Output current low (I MOTOR < I LOW)
X
X
64
Output current high (I MOTOR > I HIGH)
X
65
Feedback low (FEEDBACK < FDB LOW)
X
66
Feedback high (FEEDBACK > FDB HIGH)
X
67
Reference low (REF. < REF. LOW)
X
68
Reference high (REF. > REF. HIGH)
X
69
Temperature auto derate (TEMP.AUTO DERATE)
X
99
Unknown fault (UNKNOWN ALARM)
X
X
98

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Warnings

Alarms

A warning will flash in line 2, while an explanation is given in line 1.

If an alarm is given, the present alarm number will be shown in line 2.
Lines 3 and 4 of the display will offer an explanation.

MAINS PHASE LOSS

WARN.4

SETUP

1

TRIP (RESET)

ALARM:12

SETUP

1

TORQUE LIMIT

WARNING 1
10 VOLT LOW
The 10 V voltage from terminal 50 on the control card is below 10 V.
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10 volts supply is overloaded. Maximum load is 17 mA, minimum resistance is 590 Ω.
WARNING/ALARM 2
LIVE ZERO ERROR
The current or voltage signal on terminal 53, 54 or 60 is below 50% of the value preset in parameters 309, 312 and 315 Terminal, Minimum
Scaling.
WARNING/ALARM 4
MAINS PHASE LOSS
Phase missing on the input power. Check the supply voltage to the drive. WARNING 5
DC LINK VOLTAGE HIGH
The intermediate DC circuit voltage is higher than Voltage Warning
High, see table below. The drive is still controlling the motor.

Alarm/Warning Limits:
Drive
Undervoltage alarm
Voltage warning, low
Voltage warning, high
Overvoltage alarm

208 to 230 volt
VDC
VAC
211
151
222
159
384
276
425
305

WARNING 6
DC LINK VOLTAGE LOW
The intermediate DC circuit voltage is lower than Voltage Warning Low, see table below. The drive is still controlling the motor.
WARNING/ALARM 7
DC LINK OVERVOLT
If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than the Overvoltage
Limit of the drive (see table below), the drive will trip after a fixed period. The length of this period depends upon the unit.
WARNING/ALARM 8
Undervoltage (DC LINK UNDERVOLT)
If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC) drops below the Undervoltage
Limit of the inverter, the drive will trip after a fixed period. The length of the period depends upon the unit.
The voltage will be stated in the display. Check whether the supply voltage matches the drive rating.
WARNING/ALARM 9
INVERTER TIME
The electronic thermal inverter protection reports that the drive is about to trip because of an overload. The counter for electronic thermal inverter protection gives a warning at 98% and trips at 100% showing an alarm. The drive cannot be reset until the counter drops below
90%. Activate ASFM (Automatic Switching Frequency Modulation) in parameter 408, Interference Reduction Method, or reduce the carrier frequency in parameter 407, Switching Frequency.

380 to 460 volt
VDC
VAC
402
289
423
304
737
530
765
550

550 to 600 volt
VDC
VAC
557
413
613
443
943
667
975
689

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

99

WARNING/ALARM 10
MOTOR TIME
According to the electronic thermal protection, the motor is overheated.
Parameter 117, Motor Thermal Protection, allows a choice of whether the drive is to give a warning or an alarm when the Motor Thermal
Projection reaches 100%. The fault is that the motor is overloaded to more than 100% of the preset rated motor current for too long. Check that the motor parameters 102 through 106 have been set correctly.

ALARM 16
CURR. SHORT CIRCUIT
There is a short circuit in the output from the drive.

WARNING/ALARM 11
MOTOR THERMISTOR
The thermistor or the thermistor connection has been disconnected.
Parameter 117, Motor Thermal Protection, allows a choice of whether the drive is to give a warning or an alarm. Check that the thermistor has been correctly connected between terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input) and terminal 50 (+10 V supply).

This warning will only be enabled if parameter 510, Bus Time Interval
Function, has been set to a value different from OFF.

WARNING/ALARM 12
CURRENT LIMIT
The current is higher than the value in parameter 215, Current Limit, and the drive trips after the time set in parameter 412, Trip Delay
Overcurrent, has passed. Run AMA on a cold motor in parameter 107,
Automatic Motor Adaptation.

WARNING/ALARM 18
HPFB TIMEOUT
There is no serial communication with the communication option card in the drive.

WARNING/ALARM 13
OVER CURRENT
The inverter peak current limit, approximately 200% of the rated current, has been exceeded. The warning will last approximately 1 or
2 seconds, and then the drive will trip and signal an alarm.
Turn off the drive and check for free rotation of the motor shaft and other causes of the overload. Run AMA on a cold motor in parameter
107, Automatic Motor Adaptation.
ALARM 14
EARTH FAULT
There is current leakage from the output phases to ground, either in the leads between the drive and the motor or in the motor itself.
Remove power to the drive and correct the ground fault.
ALARM 15
SWITCH MODE FAULT
Fault in the switch mode power supply (internal ±15 V supply).
Contact the Danfoss Graham service department.

100

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Remove power to the drive and correct the short circuit.
WARNING/ALARM 17
STD BUSTIMEOUT
There is no serial communication with the drive.

If parameter 510, Bus Time Interval Function, has been set to Stop and Trip [5], the drive will first give off an alarm, then ramp down and finally trip while giving an alarm. It is possible to increase parameter
509, Bus Time Interval.

The warning will only be enabled if parameter 804, Bus Time Interval
Function, has been set to anything but OFF. If parameter 804, Bus
Time Interval Function, has been set to Stop and Trip, the drive will first give an alarm, then ramp down and finally trip while giving an alarm. Parameter 803, Bus Time Interval could possibly be increased.
Parameter 803 is only available when a communication option card is installed in the drive.
WARNING 19
EE ERROR POWER
There is a fault on the power card EEPROM. The drive will continue to function, but is likely to fail at the next power-up. Contact the Danfoss
Graham service department.
WARNING 20
EE ERROR CONTROL
There is a fault in the EEPROM on the control card. The drive will continue to function, but is likely to fail at the next power-up. Contact the
Danfoss Graham service department.

ALARM 22
AMA FAULT
A fault has been found during automatic motor adaptation (AMA). The text shown in the display indicates a fault message.
AMA can only be carried out if there are no alarms during the AMA process. CHECK 103, 105
Parameter 103 or 105 has a wrong setting. Correct the setting and repeat AMA.
LOW P 105
The motor is too small for AMA to be carried out. If AMA is to be enabled, the rated motor current, parameter 105, must be higher than 35% of the rated output current of the drive.
ASYMMETRICAL IMPEDANCE
AMA has detected an asymmetrical impedance in the motor connected to the system. The motor could be defective.

ALARM 29
HEAT SINK OVER TEMP.
The heatsink temperature became too high. For NEMA 1 drives, the limit is 90°C. For NEMA 12 drives, the limit is 80°C. The tolerance is
±5°C. The fault cannot be reset until the temperature of the heatsink has fallen below 60°C.
The fault could be due to the following:
- Ambient temperature too high
- Air obstructed
- Cooling fan(s) not operating
- Motor leads too long
- Too high a switching frequency
ALARM 30
MISSING MOT.PHASE U
Motor phase U, as indicated by the letters on the output terminal block, is missing or has a high impedance.
Remove power to the drive and check motor phase U.

MOTOR TOO BIG
The motor connected to the system is too big for AMA to be carried out. The setting in parameter 102 does not match the motor used.

ALARM 31
MISSING MOT.PHASE V
Motor phase V, as indicated by the letters on the output terminal block is missing or has a high impedance.

MOTOR TOO SMALL
The motor connected to the system is too small for AMA to be carried out. The setting in parameter 102 does not match the motor used.

Remove power to the drive and check motor phase V.

TIME OUT
AMA fails because of noisy measuring signals. Retry until AMA is successfully completed. Please note that repeated AMA runs may heat the motor to a level where the stator resistance is increased.
INTERRUPTED BY USER
AMA has been interrupted by the user.
INTERNAL FAULT
An internal fault has occurred in the drive. Contact Danfoss
Graham service department.
LIMIT VALUE FAULT
The parameter values found for the motor are outside the acceptable range within which the drive is able to work.

ALARM 32
MISSING MOT.PHASE W
Motor phase W, as indicated by the letters on the output terminal block is missing or has a high impedance.
Remove power to the drive and check motor phase W.
WARNING/ALARM 34
HPFB COMM. FAULT
The serial communication on the communication option card is not working. WARNING 35
OUT FREQ RNG/ROT LIM
This warning will occur if the output frequency has reached its Output
Frequency Low Limit , parameter 201, or Output Frequency High
Limit, parameter 202. If the drive is in Closed Loop, parameter 100, the warning will show in the display.

MOTOR ROTATES
The motor shaft is rotating. Make sure that the load is not able to make the motor shaft rotate while the AMA is being performed.
Then start AMA all over.

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

101

ALARM 37
GATE DRIVE FAULT
An output IGBT or the power card is defective. Contact the Danfoss
Graham service department.

WARNING 62
FOUT > FHIGH
The output frequency is higher than parameter 224, Warning: High
Frequency.

Auto Optimization Warnings 39 through 42
Automatic motor adaptation has stopped, because some parameters have probably been improperly set, or the motor used in too large or small for AMA to be carried out.

WARNING/ALARM 63
I MOTOR < I LOW
The output current is lower than parameter 221, Warning: Low
Current. Select the required function in parameter 409, Function in
Case of No Load.

A choice must be made by pressing CHANGE DATA and choosing
‘Continue’ + OK or ‘Stop’ + OK.
If parameters need to be changed, select ‘Stop’, change the parameters and run AMA again.
WARNING 39
CHECK PAR. 104, 106
Parameters 104, Motor Frequency, or 106, Rated Motor Speed, have probably not been set correctly. Correct the setting and run AMA again. WARNING 40
CHECK PAR. 103, 105
Parameter 103 Motor Voltage, or 105 Motor Current, has not been set correctly. Correct the setting and run AMA again.
WARNING 41
MOTOR TOO BIG
The motor used is probably too large for AMA to be carried out. The setting in parameter 102 Motor Power, may not match the motor. Check the motor and select ‘Continue’ or [STOP].
WARNING 42
MOTOR TOO SMALL
The motor used is probably too small for AMA to be carried out. The setting in parameter 102 Motor Power, may not match the motor. Check the motor and select ‘Continue’ or [STOP].
ALARM 60
EXTERNAL FAULT
Terminal 27, parameter 304, Digital Inputs, has been programmed for a Safety Interlock and is a logic ‘0’.
WARNING 61
FOUT < FLOW
The output frequency is lower than parameter 223, Warning: Low
Frequency.

102

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

WARNING 64
I MOTOR > I HIGH
The output current is higher than parameter 222, Warning: High
Current.
WARNING 65
FEEDBACK < FDB LOW
The resulting feedback value is lower than parameter 227, Warning:
Low Feedback.
WARNING 66
FEEDBACK > FDB HIGH
The resulting feedback value is higher than parameter 228, Warning:
High Feedback.
WARNING 67
REF. < REF LOW
The remote controlled reference is lower than parameter 225,
Warning: Low Reference.
WARNING 68
REF. > REF HIGH
The remote controlled reference is higher than parameter 226,
Warning: High Reference.
WARNING 69
TEMP.AUTO DERATE
The heat sink temperature has exceeded the maximum value and the auto derating function in parameter 411, Function at Over Temp, is active. WARNING 99
UNKNOWN ALARM
An unknown fault has occurred which the software is not able to handle. Contact Danfoss Graham service department.

Calculation of Resulting Reference
The calculation made below gives the resulting reference when parameter 210, Reference Type, is programmed for Sum and Relative, respectively. In Open Loop, parameters 418 and 419, Setpoints 1 and
2, should be set to 0. If they are not set to 0, parameter 417, Feedback
Function, will affect the reference.

Ext. ref. =

(Par. 205 Max. ref. - Par. 204 Min. ref.) x Ana. signal Term. 53 [V]
Par. 310 Term. 53 Max. scaling - Par. 309 Term. 53 Min. scaling
(Par. 205 Max. ref. - Par. 204 Min. ref.) x Par. 314 Term. 60 [mA]
Par.316 Term.60Max.scaling-Par.315Term.60Min.scaling

External reference is the sum of references from terminals 53, 54,
60 and serial communication. The sum of these can never exceed parameter 205, Maximum Reference.
External reference can be calculated as follows:

+
+

(Par. 205 Max. ref. - Par. 204 Min. ref.) x Ana. signal Term. 54 [V]
Par. 313Term. 54 Max. scaling -Par. 312Term. 54 Min. scaling

+

serial com. reference x (Par. 205 Max. ref. - Par. 204 Min. ref.)
16384 (4000 Hex)

Parameter 210, Reference Type, is programmed = Sum
(Par. 205 Max. ref. - Par. 204 Min. ref.) x Par. 211-214 Preset ref.

Res. ref. =

+ External ref. + Par. 204 Min. ref. + Feedback setpoint

100

Parameter 210, Reference Type, is programmed = Relative
Res. ref. =

External reference x Par. 211-214 Preset ref.

100

+ Par. 204 Min. ref. + Feedback setpoint

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

103

Factory Settings
Changes During Operation:
“Yes” means that the parameter can be changed while the drive is in operation. “No” means that the drive must be stopped before a change can be made.
4-Setup:
“Yes” means that the parameter can be programmed individually in each of the four setups. The same parameter can have four different data values. “No” means that the data value will be the same in all four setups. Conversion Index:
This number refers to a conversion figure to be used when writing or reading to or from the drive by means of serial communication.
Since a parameter value can only be transferred as a whole number, a conversion factor must be used to transfer decimals.
Example:

Conversion Index
74
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4

Conversion Index Factors

Data type
3
4
5
6
7
9

Data type shows the type and length of the packet.

0..
#
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017

104

Description
Integer 16
Integer 32
Unsigned 8
Unsigned 16
Unsigned 32
Text string

Data Type Descriptions

Parameter 201: Minimum Frequency, conversion factor 0.1. If parameter 201 is to be set to 10 Hz, a value of 100 must be transferred, since a conversion factor of 0.1 means that the transferred value will be multiplied by 0.1. A value of 100 will, therefore, be understood as 10.0.
Data type:

Conversion Factor
3.6
100.0
10.0
1.0
0.1
0.01
0.001
0.0001

NOTE
Installation of Cascade Controller Option Card in VLT 6000 series drives will change some default parameter settings. See Cascade
Controller Manual for details.

Operation and Display
Parameter
Factory Setting
Description
ENGLISH
Language
SETUP 1
Active Setup
NO COPY
Copying of Setups
NO COPY
LCP Copy
100.000
Max Value of User-defined Readout
%
Unit for User-defined Readout
FREQUENCY, %
Big Display Readout
REFERENCE, %
Small Display Readout 1.1
MOTOR CURRENT, A
Small Display Readout 1.2
POWER, HP
Small Display Readout 1.3
% OF F MAX
Unit of Local Reference
ENABLE
Hand Start on LCP
OFF/STOP
ENABLE
OFF/STOP on LCP
ENABLE
Auto Start on LCP
ENABLE
Reset on LCP
NOT LOCKED
Lock for Data Change
AUTO RESTART
Operating State at Power-up

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Range

Changes
During Operation
Yes
Yes
No
No
0 - 999.999,999
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

4-Setup
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conversion
Index
0
0
0
0
-2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Data
Type
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

1..
#

Load and Motor

100
101
102
103
104
105
106

Parameter
Description
Configuration orque Torque Characteristics
Motor Power
Motor Voltage
Motor Frequency
Motor Current
Rated Motor Speed

107
108
109
110
111
112
113

Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA
Start Voltage of Parallel Motors
Resonance Dampening
Breakaway Tor orque High Breakaway Tor que
Start Delay
Motor Preheater
Motor Preheater DC Current

OPEN LOOP
AEO FUNCTION
Depends on the unit
Depends on the unit
60 Hz
Depends on the unit
Depends on par. 102 Motor power
NO AMA
Depends on par. 103
100%
OFF
000.0 s
DISABLE
50%

114
115
116
117

DC Braking Current
Time
DC Braking T ime
DC Brake Cut-in Frequency
Motor Thermal Protection

50%
10.0 s
OFF
ETR TRIP 1

2..
#
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228

Factory Setting

Range

Changes
During Operation
No
No
0.25 - 500 kW
No
200 - 575 V
No
24 - 1000 Hz
No
0.01 - I
No
100-60000 rpm
No

0.0 - par. 103
0 - 500 %
0.0 - 0.5 sec.
0.0 - 120.0 sec.
0 - 100 %
0 - 100 %
0.0 - 60.0 sec.
0.0-par. 202

4-Setup
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conversion
Index
0
0
-2
0
0
-2
0

Data
Type
5
5
6
6
6
7
6

No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

0
-1
0
-1
-1
0
0

5
6
6
5
6
5
6

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

0
-1
-1
0

6
6
6
5

4-Setup

Conversion
Index
0
-1
-1
0
-3
-3
0
0
0
-1
0
-2
-2
-2
-2
-1
0
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-3
-3
-3
-3

Data
Type
5
6
6
5
4
4
7
7
5
6
5
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
4
4
4

References and Limits
Parameter
Description
Output Frequency Range
Output Frequency Low Limit
Output Frequency High Limit
Reference Handling
Minimum Reference
Maximum Reference
Time
Ramp-up T ime
Time
Ramp-down T ime
Automatic Ramp-up/down
Jog Frequency
Reference Type
Reference Type
Preset Reference 1
Preset Reference 2
Preset Reference 3
Preset Reference 4
Current Limit
Frequency Bypass Bandwidth
Frequency Bypass 1
Frequency Bypass 2
Frequency Bypass 3
Frequency Bypass 4
Warning: Low Current
Warning: High Current, I
Warning: Low Frequency
Warning: High Frequency
Warning: Low Reference
Warning: High Reference
Warning: Low Feedback
Warning: High Feedback

Factory Setting

Range

Changes during operation
0 - 120 Hz
0 - 1000 Hz
No
Fans=6 Hz, Pumps=18 Hz
0.0 - par. 202
Yes
60 Hz par. 201 - par. 200
Yes
LINKED TO HAND/AUTO
Yes
Fans=6 Hz, Pumps=18 Hz
0.000-RefMAX
Yes
000060.000 Hz
RefMIN-999.999,999
Yes
Fans=60 sec., Pumps=10 sec. 1 - 3600 sec.
Yes
Fans=60 sec., Pumps=10 sec. 1 - 3600 sec.
Yes
ENABLE
Yes
10.0 Hz par. 201 - par. 202
Yes
EXTERNAL PRESET
Yes
0.00%
-100.00 - 100.00 %
Yes
0.00 %
-100.00 - 100.00 %
Yes
0.00 %
-100.00 - 100.00 %
Yes
0.00 %
-100,00 - 100,00 %
Yes
Depends on the unit
0 - I [A]
Yes
DISABLED
0 - 120 Hz
Yes
120.0 Hz
0.0 - par. 200
Yes
120.0 Hz
0.0 - par. 200
Yes
120.0 Hz
0.0 - par. 200
Yes
120.0 Hz
0.0 - par. 200
Yes
0.0 A
0.0 - par. 222
Yes
I [A]
Par. 221 - I [A]
Yes
0.0 Hz
0.0 - par. 224
Yes
120.0 Hz
Par. 223 - par. 200/202 Yes
-999,999.999 Hz
-999,999.999 - par. 226 Yes
999,999.999 Hz
Par. 225 - 999,999.999 Yes
-999,999.999 Hz
-999,999.999 - par. 228 Yes
999,999.999 Hz
Par. 227 - 999,999.999 Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

105

3..
#
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311

Inputs and Outputs
Parameter
Description
Terminal 16 Digital Input
Terminal 17 Digital Input
Terminal 18 Digital Input
Terminal 19 Digital Input
Terminal 27 Digital Input
Terminal 29 Digital Input
Terminal 32 Digital Input
Terminal 33 Digital Input
Terminal 53, Analog
I nput Voltage
Terminal 53, Min. Scaling
Terminal 53, Max. Scaling
Terminal 54, Analog

I nput Voltage
312 Terminal 54, Min. Scaling
313 Terminal 54, Max. Scaling
314 Terminal 60, Analog Input
Current
315 Terminal 60, Min. Scaling
316 Terminal 60, Max. Scaling
317 Live Zero T ime
Zero
318 Function After T ime Out
Time
319 Terminal 42, Output
320 Terminal 42, Output,
Pulse Scaling
321 Terminal 45, Output
322 Terminal 45, Output,
Pulse Scaling
323 Relay 1, Output Function
324 Relay 01, ON Delay
325 Relay 01, OFF Delay
326 Relay 2, Output Function
327 Pulse Reference,
Max. Frequency
328 Pulse Feedback, Max. Freq.

106

Factory Setting

Range

Changes
During Operation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

4-Setup
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conversion
Index
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Data
Type
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

0.0 - 10.0 V
0.0 - 10.0 V

Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes

-1
-1
0

5
5
5

0.0 V
10.0 V
REFERENCE

0.0 - 10.0 V

Yes

Yes

-1

5

0.0 - 10.0 V

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

-1
0

5
5

0.0 - 20.0 mA
0.0 - 20.0 mA
1 - 99 sec.

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

-4
-4
0
0
0
0

5
5
5
5
5
6

RESET
NO OPERATION
START
REVERSING
SAFETY INTERLOCK
JOG
NO OPERATION
NO OPERATION
NO OPERATION
0.0 V
10.0 V
NO OPERATION

4.0 mA
20.0 mA
10 sec.
NO FUNCTION
MOTOR CURRENT
5000 Hz

4 - 20 mA
1 - 32000 Hz

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

OUT. FREQ.
5000 Hz

4 - 20 mA
1 - 32000 Hz

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

0
0

5
6

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

0
0
0
0
0

5
6
6
5
6

Yes

Yes

0

6

NO ALARM
0 sec.
2 sec.
RUNNING
5000 Hz
25000 Hz

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

0 - 600 sec.
0 - 600 sec.
Depends on input terminal
0 - 65000 Hz

4..
#

Application Functions

400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414

Parameter
Description
Reset Function
Time
Automatic Restart T ime
Flying Start
Timer
Sleep Mode T imer
Sleep Frequency
Wake up Frequency
Boost Setpoint
Switching Frequency
Interference Reduction Method
Function in Case of No Load
Function at Phase Loss
Temp
Function at Over Temp
Overcurr
current
Trip Delay Over current
Minimum Feedback
Maximum Feedback

415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427

Units Relating to Closed Loop
Feedback Conversion
Feedback Calculation
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2
PID Normal/Inverse Control
Windup
PID Anti Windup
PID Start-up Frequency
PID Proportional Gain
Time
PID Integral T ime
Differ
ferentiation Time
PID Differentiation T ime
PID Differentiation Gain Limit
Time
PID Lowpass Filter Time

Factory Setting

Changes
During Operation
INFINITE AUTOMATIC
Yes
10 sec.
0 - 600 sec.
Yes
Fans=ENABLE, Pumps=DISABLE
Yes
OFF
0 - 300 sec.
Yes
0 Hz
Min freq - Par. 405
Yes
60 Hz
Par. 404 - max freq
Yes
100%
0 - 200 %
Yes
Depends on the unit
3.0 - 14.0 kHz
Yes
ASFM
Yes
WARNING
Yes
TRIP
Yes
TRIP
Yes
60 sec.
0 - 60 sec.
Yes
0.000
-999,999.999 - FBMIN
Yes
100.000
FBMIN - 999,999.999
Yes
%
LINEAR
MAXIMUM
0.000
0.000
NORMAL
ENABLE
0 Hz
0.30
OFF
OFF
5.0
0.01

Range

Min to max fdbk.
Min to max fdbk.

Min. to max. freq.
0.00 - 10.00
0.01 - 9999.00 s. (Off)
0.0 (Off) - 10.00 sec.
5.0 - 50.0
0.01 - 10.00

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

4-Setup
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conversion
Index
0
0
-1
0
-1
-1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
-3
-3

Data
Type
5
6
5
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

-1
0
0
-3
-3
0
0
-1
-2
-2
-2
-1
-2

5
5
5
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
6
6
6

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

107

5..
#
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
555
556
560
565
566

108

Serial Communication
Parameter
Factory Setting
Description
FC
Protocol
001
Address
9600 BAUD
Baudrate
LOGIC OR
Coasting
LOGIC OR
DC-brake
LOGIC OR
Start
DIGITAL INPUT
Reversing
LOGIC OR
Selection of Setup
LOGIC OR
Selection of Preset Reference
Data Read-out: Reference %
Data Read-out: Reference Unit
Data Read-out: Feedback
Data Read-out: Frequency
User Defined Read-out
Data Read-out: Current
Power,
Data Read-out: Power, kW
Power,
Data Read-out: Power, HP
Data Read-out: Motor Voltage
Data Read-out: DC Link Voltage
Data Read-out: Motor temp.
VLT Temp.
Data Read-out: VLT Temp.
Data Read-out: Digital Input
Terminal
Data Read-out: Terminal 53, Analog Input
Terminal
Data Read-out: Terminal 54, Analog Input
Terminal
Data Read-out: Terminal 60, Analog Input
Data Read-out: Pulse Reference
Data Read-out: External Reference %
Data Read-out: Status Word, Hex
Temperatur
emperature
Data Read-out: Heat Sink Temperatur e
Data Read-out: Alarm Word, Hex
Data Read-out: Control Word, Hex
Data Read-out: Warning Word, Hex
Data Read-out: Extended Status Word, Hex
Text
Display Text 1
Text
Display Text 2
00000
Bus Feedback 1
00000
Bus Feedback 2
Data Read-out: Relay Status
Time
60 sec.
Bus T ime Interval
Time
NO FUNCTION
Bus T ime Interval Function
Time
OFF
N2 Overide Release T ime
Time
60 sec.
FLN Bus T ime Interval
Time
OFF
FLN Bus T ime Interval Function

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Range

Depends on par. 500

1 to 99 sec.
1 to 65534 sec.
1 to 65534 sec.

Changes
4-Setup
during operation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Conversion
Index
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-1
-3
-3
-1
-2
-2

Data
Type
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
4
4
6
7
7

1
-2
-1
0
0
0
0
-1
-1
4
-1
-1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

7
7
6
6
5
5
5
3
3
3
7
3
6
5
7
6
7
7
9
9
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
5

6..
#
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631

7..
#
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711

Service Functions
Parameter
Factory Setting
Description
Operating Data: Operating Hours
Operating Data: Hours Run
Operating Data: kWh Counter
Operating Data: No. of Power Ups
Operating Data: No. of Overtemps
Operating Data: No. of Overvoltages
Data Log: Digital Input
Data Log: Bus Command
Data Log: Bus Status Word
Data Log: Reference
Data Log: Feedback
Data Log: Output Frequency
Data Log: Output Voltage
Data Log: Output Current
Data Log: DC link Voltage
Fault Log: Error Code
Time
Fault Log: T ime
Fault Log: Value
DO NOT RESET
Reset of kWh Counter
DO NOT RESET
Reset of Hours Run Counter
NORMAL OPERATION
Operating Mode
Type
Nameplate: Unit Type
Nameplate: Power Component
VLT Ordering
Nameplate: VLT Ordering No.
Nameplate: Software Version No.
Nameplate: LCP Identification No.
Nameplate: Database Identification No.
Nameplate: Power Component Identification No.
Type
Nameplate: Application Option Type
Nameplate: Application Option Ordering No.
Type
Nameplate: Communication Option Type
Ordering
Nameplate: Communication Option Ordering No.

Range

Changes
During Operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

4-Setup
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

Conversion
Index
-1
-1
-1
0
0
0
0
0
0
-1
-3
-1
-1
-2
0

Data
Type
7
7
7
6
6
6
5
6
6
3
4
-3
6
3
6

No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-2
0
0
0
0
0

5
7
3
5
5
5
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9

4-Setup

Conversion
Index
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Data
Type
5
6
6
5
6
6
5
6
6
5
6
6

Option Card (for the four relay option card)
Parameter
Description
Relay 6, Output Function
Relay 6, On Delay
Relay 6, Off Delay
Relay 7, Output Function
Relay 7, On Delay
Relay 7, Off Delay
Relay 8, Output Function
Relay 8, On Delay
Relay 8, Off Delay
Relay 9, Output Function
Relay 9, On Delay
Relay 9, Off Delay

Factory Setting
Running
000 sec.
000 sec.
NO FUNCTION
000 sec.
000 sec.
NO FUNCTION
000 sec.
000 sec.
NO FUNCTION
000 sec.
000 sec.

Range

0 to 600
0 to 600
0 to 600
0 to 600
0 to 600
0 to 600
0 to 600
0 to 600

Changes
During Operation
Yes
sec.
Yes
sec.
Yes
Yes sec. Yes sec. Yes
Yes
sec.
Yes
sec.
Yes
Yes sec. Yes sec. Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

109

Index
A
activation .......................................................................................... 95 address ............................................................................................ 73
AEO FUNCTION ............................................................................. 36
AI [ma] 60 FUNCT. .......................................................................... 54
AI [v] 53 FUNCT. ............................................................................. 53
AI [v] 54 FUNCT. ............................................................................. 54
AI 53 SCALE HIGH .......................................................................... 54
AI 53 SCALE LOW ........................................................................... 54
AI 54 SCALE HIGH .......................................................................... 54
AI 54 SCALE LOW ........................................................................... 54
AI 60 SCALE HIGH .......................................................................... 55
AI 60 SCALE LOW ........................................................................... 55
ALARM ............................................................................................ 24 alarm lamp ....................................................................................... 25 alarm word ....................................................................................... 88
ALARM WORD, HEX ....................................................................... 85 alarms .............................................................................................. 99
AMA STOP ...................................................................................... 38
ANALOG 60 [mA] ............................................................................. 33 analog input 53 [V] ........................................................................... 33 analog input 54 [V] ........................................................................... 33 analog inputs .................................................................................... 53 analog output.................................................................................... 56 anti-windup ...................................................................................... 66
AO 42 PULS SCALE ........................................................................ 58
AO 45 FUNCTION ........................................................................... 58
AO 45 PULS SCALE ........................................................................ 58
APPLIC. OPTION ............................................................................ 94
APPLIC. ORDER NO ....................................................................... 94 application functions ................................................................... 31, 61
ASFM .............................................................................................. 63
ASYMMETRICAL IMPEDANCE .................................................... 101
AUTO MOTOR ADAPT ................................................................... 38
AUTO RAMPING ............................................................................. 45 auto reset ......................................................................................... 61 auto restart ....................................................................................... 36 auto restart time ................................................................................ 61 auto start ................................................................................... 25, 52
AUTO START BTTN ....................................................................... 35
AUTO START key ........................................................................... 25 automatic energy optimization ..................................................... 18, 36 automatic motor adaptation ......................................................... 18, 38 automatic reset.................................................................................. 61 automatic switching frequency modulation .......................................... 63 auxiliary enclosure ............................................................................. 8 auxiliary relay .................................................................................... 8

B bandwidth, bypass ........................................................................... 47
BAUDRATE ..................................................................................... 82 blocks, terminal ...................................................................... 8, 9, 10 boost setpoint.................................................................................... 63 bus, DC ........................................................................................... 18
110

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

BUS FEEDBACK 2 .......................................................................... 87
BUS FEEDBACK1 ........................................................................... 87
BUS TIME INTERVAL ..................................................................... 87
BUS TIME INTERVAL FUNCTION .................................................. 87 bypass bandwidth ............................................................................ 47
BYPASS FREQ. 1 ............................................................................ 47
BYPASS FREQ. 2 ............................................................................ 47
BYPASS FREQ. 3 ............................................................................ 47
BYPASS FREQ. 4 ............................................................................ 47 bypass frequencies .......................................................................... 42 byte, data control .............................................................................. 74

C cable, shielded control ........................................................................ 5 calculation of resulting reference ..................................................... 103
CANCEL key ................................................................................... 24 card, relay option ............................................................................. 95 carrier frequency .............................................................................. 61 catch a rotating motor ........................................................................ 61
CHANGE DATA key ......................................................................... 24
CHECK 103, 105 ........................................................................... 101
CHECK PAR. 103, 105 .................................................................. 102
CHECK PAR. 104, 106 .................................................................. 102 clearance, side ................................................................................... 5 clearances ......................................................................................... 5 closed loop ................................................................................ 36, 44
COASTING ...................................................................................... 82 coasting stop, inverse ....................................................................... 51
COM. OPTION ................................................................................. 94
COM. ORDER NO ........................................................................... 94 communication, serial ................................................................. 21, 72 conduit entry .................................................................. 8, 9, 10, 14
CONFIG. MODE .............................................................................. 36 connection examples ........................................................................ 23 connections, control .......................................................................... 19 connections, motor ............................................................................ 14 connections, power .......................................................................... 14 connector, test ................................................................................... 93 control connections ........................................................................... 19 control, differentiation ........................................................................ 67 control panel .................................................................................... 24 control terminals ................................................................................ 19 control word ..................................................................................... 78 controller .......................................................................................... 66 controller, PID ................................................................................... 66 conversion factor ..................................................................... 78, 104 conversion, feedback ....................................................................... 69
COPY TO SETUP 1 ......................................................................... 32
COPY TO SETUP 2 ......................................................................... 32
COPY TO SETUP 3 ......................................................................... 32
COPY TO SETUP 4 ......................................................................... 32
CURRENT ...................................................................................... 85 current ............................................................................................. 42
CURRENT HIGH ............................................................................. 48

CURRENT LIMIT ............................................................................ 47
CURRENT LOW .............................................................................. 48 current, output .................................................................................. 47
CUST. READ. UNIT ....................................................................... 33
CUSTOM READOUT ............................................................... 33, 85

EXT. REFERENCE [%] ................................................................... 33
EXTEND MENU .............................................................................. 24 extend menu key .............................................................................. 31 extended status word ....................................................................... 88
EXTERNAL REFERENCE ............................................................... 85

D

F

Danfoss FC protocol ......................................................................... 72
DATA CHANGE LOCK ..................................................................... 35 data change lock .............................................................................. 52 data control byte ............................................................................... 74 data, log ........................................................................................... 91
DC BRAKE ...................................................................................... 83
DC BRAKE CURRENT .................................................................... 40
DC BRAKE CUT-IN ......................................................................... 40
DC brake cut-in frequency ................................................................ 40
DC BRAKE TIME ............................................................................. 40
DC braking current ........................................................................... 40
DC braking, inverse ......................................................................... 51
DC braking time ................................................................................ 40
DC bus ............................................................................................ 18
DC LINK VOLTAGE ......................................................................... 85
DC VOLTAGE [V] ............................................................................. 33 deactivation time ............................................................................... 95 derivative ......................................................................................... 66 differentiation control ......................................................................... 67 differentiation time .............................................................................. 71 differentiator ...................................................................................... 71
DIGITAL INPUT ............................................................................... 85
DIGITAL INPUT [BIN] ...................................................................... 33 digital inputs ............................................................................... 19, 50
DIP switches .................................................................................... 21
DISABLE ......................................................................................... 35 display, LCD .................................................................................... 24 display modes ........................................................................... 24, 25
DISPLAY TEXT ARRAY 1 ................................................................ 86
DISPLAY TEXT ARRAY 2 ................................................................ 86 disturbances, signal ............................................................................ 5 download ......................................................................................... 32
DOWNLOAD ALL PARAM. ............................................................... 32
DOWNLOAD SIZE INDEP. ............................................................... 32 drive type ......................................................................................... 94

F. LOG: ERROR CODE ................................................................... 92
F. LOG: TIME ................................................................................... 92
F. LOG: VALUE ................................................................................ 92 factory settings ................................................................................ 104 factory setup ..................................................................................... 31
FC protocol ...................................................................................... 82
FEEDBACK ..................................................................................... 85 feedback .......................................................................................... 42
FEEDBACK 1 [UNITS] .................................................................... 33
FEEDBACK 2 [UNITS] .................................................................... 33 feedback [units] ................................................................................. 33
FEEDBACK CONV. ......................................................................... 69 feedback conversion ........................................................................ 69
FEEDBACK HIGH ........................................................................... 49
FEEDBACK LOW ............................................................................. 49 feedback signal .......................................................................... 66, 67 feedback signals ............................................................................... 65 filter, EMI .......................................................................................... 22 filter, LC ............................................................................................ 38 filter, lowpass ............................................................................. 67, 71 final adjustments ................................................................................ 30 fixed switching frequency .................................................................. 63
FLA .................................................................................................. 37
FLN ................................................................................................. 72 flow .................................................................................................. 69 flying start ......................................................................................... 61 freeze output .................................................................................... 51 freeze reference ............................................................................... 51 frequencies, bypass ......................................................................... 42
FREQUENCY .................................................................................. 85
FREQUENCY [%] ........................................................................... 33
FREQUENCY [HZ] .......................................................................... 33 frequency, bypass bandwidth ........................................................... 47 frequency, carrier ............................................................................. 61 frequency, fixed switching ................................................................. 63
FREQUENCY LOW ......................................................................... 48 frequency, present output .................................................................. 81
FREQUENCY RANGE..................................................................... 42 frequency, switching ......................................................................... 63 full load current rating ....................................................................... 37
FUNCT. LOW CURR. ...................................................................... 63 fuses, input ......................................................................................... 7 fuses, internal drive ............................................................................ 7

E electrical noise .................................................................................. 22 electronic thermal protection .............................................................. 14 electronic thermal relay ................................................................ 2, 14
EMI .................................................................................................. 22
EMI filter ........................................................................................... 22
ENABLE .......................................................................................... 35 enclosure, auxiliary ............................................................................ 8
ENERGY [UNIT] .............................................................................. 33 entry, conduit .................................................................. 8, 9, 10, 14 error code ........................................................................................ 76
ETR ................................................................................................. 41 examples, connection ....................................................................... 23

G galvanic isolation .............................................................................. 22 ground leakage current .................................................................... 22 ground terminals ............................................................................... 15 grounding ........................................................................................ 14 grounding plate .................................................................................. 5
VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

111

H hand start .................................................................................. 25, 52
HAND START BTTN ....................................................................... 35
HEATSINK TEMP ..................................................................... 33, 85 high breakaway torque..................................................................... 39
HIGH START TORQ. ....................................................................... 39 high-voltage relay ............................................................................ 18
HOURS RUN ................................................................................... 33

I initialization ....................................................................................... 29 initialization, manual .......................................................................... 29 input fuses .......................................................................................... 7 input power ........................................................................ 11, 12, 13 inputs and outputs ...................................................................... 31, 50 inputs, digital .............................................................................. 19, 50 installation checks ............................................................................. 30 integral ............................................................................................. 66 integrator .......................................................................................... 71 interference reduction ....................................................................... 61
INTERNAL FAULT ......................................................................... 101
INTERRUPTED BY USER ............................................................ 101 inverse regulation ............................................................................. 66

J jog ................................................................................................... 52
JOG FREQUENCY .......................................................................... 45
Johnson Controls Metasys N2 ................................................... 72, 82

K key, extend menu ............................................................................. 31 kWh COUNTER ............................................................................... 90

L
L1, L2 and L3 ..................................................................... 11, 12, 13 lamp, alarm ...................................................................................... 25 lamp, warning ................................................................................... 25 language .......................................................................................... 28
LARGE READOUT ......................................................................... 33
LC filter ............................................................................................. 38
LCD display ..................................................................................... 24
LCP copy ......................................................................................... 32
LCP ID NO. ..................................................................................... 94 leads, motor ..................................................................................... 11
LED, power on ................................................................................. 25
LIMIT VALUE FAULT ..................................................................... 101
LIVE ZERO FUNCT. ........................................................................ 55
LIVE ZERO TIME ............................................................................ 55 load and motor .......................................................................... 31, 36 load, loss of ...................................................................................... 61 lock for data change ......................................................................... 24
LOCKED .......................................................................................... 35 log data ............................................................................................ 91 log, digital input ................................................................................. 91

112

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

LOG: BUS COMMAND .................................................................... 91
LOG: BUS STAT WD ........................................................................ 91
LOG: DC LINK VOLT ....................................................................... 91
LOG: FEEDBACK ............................................................................ 91
LOG: MOTOR CURR. ..................................................................... 91
LOG: MOTOR FREQ. ...................................................................... 91
LOG: MOTOR VOLT ........................................................................ 91
LOG: REFERENCE ......................................................................... 91 loss of load ....................................................................................... 61
LOW P 105 .................................................................................... 101 lowpass filter .............................................................................. 67, 71

M manual initialization ........................................................................... 29 manual reset .................................................................................... 61
MAX. FEEDBACK ............................................................................ 65
MAX. FREQUENCY ........................................................................ 42
MAX. REFERENCE ......................................................................... 44 messages, status .............................................................................. 96 metal grounding plate ....................................................................... 14
Metasys N2 ...................................................................................... 82 meters .............................................................................................. 25
MIN. FEEDBACK ............................................................................. 65
MIN. FREQUENCY ......................................................................... 42
MIN. REFERENCE .......................................................................... 44 minimum frequency ........................................................................... 28
MOT. THERM PROTEC .................................................................. 41 motor connections ............................................................................. 14
MOTOR CURRENT ........................................................................ 37 motor current .................................................................................... 28
MOTOR CURRENT [A] ................................................................... 33
MOTOR FREQUENCY .................................................................... 37 motor frequency ............................................................................... 28 motor leads ...................................................................................... 11
MOTOR NOM. SPEED .................................................................... 38 motor nominal speed ........................................................................ 28
MOTOR POWER ............................................................................. 37 motor power ..................................................................................... 28
MOTOR PREHEAT .......................................................................... 39 motor preheat ................................................................................... 39 motor preheat DC current ................................................................. 39
MOTOR ROTATES ........................................................................ 101
MOTOR TEMPERATURE ................................................................ 85 motor temperature ............................................................................ 41 motor thermal protection .................................................................... 41
MOTOR TOO BIG .......................................................................... 101
MOTOR TOO SMALL .................................................................... 101
MOTOR VOLT ................................................................................. 85
MOTOR VOLTAGE .......................................................................... 37 motor voltage............................................................................. 28, 33 motor wiring ..................................................................................... 14 motors, multiple ................................................................................. 14
MULTI SETUP ................................................................................. 31 multi-setup ........................................................................................ 31
MULTIM.START VOLT..................................................................... 39
MULTIPLE MOTORS ....................................................................... 36 multiple motors ........................................................................... 14, 18

N
N2 ................................................................................................... 72 nameplate ........................................................................................ 94
National Electrical Code ...................................................................... 2
NEC ................................................................................................... 2
NEMA 1 ....................................................................................... 5, 8
NEMA 12 ........................................................................................... 9
NO AMA .......................................................................................... 38
NO COPY ........................................................................................ 32 noise, electrical ................................................................................. 22 noise, radio frequency ........................................................................ 5
NOISE REDUCTION ....................................................................... 63
NOT LOCKED ................................................................................. 35

O
OFF/START key ....................................................................... 25, 35
OFF/STOP ...................................................................................... 36
OK ................................................................................................... 24
ON ................................................................................................... 24
OPEN LOOP .................................................................................... 36 open loop .................................................................................. 36, 44
OPERATING HOURS ...................................................................... 90 operation and display ....................................................................... 31
OPERATION MODE ........................................................................ 92 operational tests — AUTO ................................................................ 30 operational tests — HAND ................................................................ 30
ORDERING NO ............................................................................... 94 output current ................................................................................... 47 output frequency high limit ................................................................. 42 output frequency low limit .................................................................. 42 output frequency range..................................................................... 42 output signal ..................................................................................... 56
OVER TEMPS ................................................................................. 90
OVER VOLTS .................................................................................. 90
OVERLOADDELAY .......................................................................... 64

P parallel motors ........................................................................... 36, 39
PARAM DB ID .................................................................................. 94
Parameters
001 Language ............................................................................. 31
002 Active Setup .......................................................................... 31
003 Copying of Setups ................................................................. 32
004 LCP Copy............................................................................. 32
005 Maximum Value of User-defined Readout .............................. 33
006 Unit for User Defined Readout ............................................... 33
007 Large Display Readout ......................................................... 33
008 Small Display Readout 1.1 .................................................... 34
009 Small Display Readout 1.2 .................................................... 34
010 Small Display Readout 1.3 .................................................... 35
011 Unit of Local Reference .......................................................... 35
012 Hand Start on LCP ................................................................ 35
013 OFF/STOP on LCP (STOP BUTTON) .................................. 35
014 Auto Start on LCP ................................................................. 35
016 Lock for Data Change ........................................................... 35

017 Operating State at Power up, Local ........................................ 36
100 Configuration ......................................................................... 36
101 Torque Characteristics ........................................................... 36
102 Motor Power ......................................................................... 37
103 Motor Voltage ........................................................................ 37
104 Motor Frequency .................................................................. 37
105 Motor Current ....................................................................... 37
106 Rated Motor Speed ............................................................... 38
107 Automatic Motor Adaptation .................................................... 38
107 Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA .......................................... 38
108 Start Voltage of Parallel Motors ............................................... 39
109 Resonance Dampening ......................................................... 39
110 High Breakaway Torque ....................................................... 39
111 Start Delay............................................................................. 39
112 Motor Preheat ....................................................................... 39
113 Motor Preheat DC Current .................................................... 39
114 DC Braking Current............................................................... 40
115 DC Braking Time ................................................................... 40
116 DC Brake Cut-in Frequency .................................................. 40
117 Motor Thermal Protection ....................................................... 41
200 Output Frequency Range ...................................................... 42
201 Output Frequency Low Limit .................................................. 42
202 Output Frequency High Limit ................................................. 42
203 Reference Handling .............................................................. 43
204 Minimum Reference............................................................... 44
205 Maximum Reference ............................................................. 44
206 Ramp Up Time ...................................................................... 45
207 Ramp Down Time ................................................................. 45
208 Automatic Ramp Up/Down ..................................................... 45
209 Jog Frequency ..................................................................... 45
210 Reference Type ................................................................... 46
211 Preset Reference 1................................................................ 47
212 Preset Reference 2 ............................................................... 47
213 Preset Reference 3 ............................................................... 47
214 Preset Reference 4 ............................................................... 47
215 Current Limit .......................................................................... 47
216 Frequency Bypass, Bandwidth.............................................. 47
217 Frequency Bypass 1 ............................................................. 47
218 Frequency Bypass 2 ............................................................. 47
219 Frequency Bypass 3 ............................................................. 47
220 Frequency Bypass 4 ............................................................. 47
221 Warning: Low Current ........................................................... 48
222 Warning: High Current .......................................................... 48
223 Warning: Low Frequency ...................................................... 48
224 Warning: High Frequency ..................................................... 48
225 Warning: Low Reference ....................................................... 49
226 Warning: High Reference ...................................................... 49
227 Warning: Low Feedback ....................................................... 49
228 Warning: High Feedback ....................................................... 49
308 Terminal 53 ........................................................................... 53
309 Terminal 53 ........................................................................... 54
309 Terminal 53, Minimum Scaling................................................ 54
310 Terminal 53, Maximum Scaling ............................................. 54
311 Terminal 54, Analog Input Voltage .......................................... 54
312 Terminal 54, Minimum Scaling................................................ 54
313 Terminal 54, Maximum Scaling .............................................. 54
314 Terminal 60, Analog Input Current ......................................... 54

315 Terminal 60, Minimum Scaling................................................ 55
316 Terminal 60, Maximum Scaling .............................................. 55
317 Time Out ............................................................................... 55
318 Function After Time Out ......................................................... 55
320 Terminal 42, Output, Pulse Scaling ......................................... 58
321 Terminal 45, Output ............................................................... 58
322 Terminal 45, Output, Pulse Scaling ......................................... 58
323 Relay 1, Output Function ....................................................... 60
324 Relay 01, ON Delay.............................................................. 60
325 Relay 01, OFF Delay ............................................................ 60
326 Relay 2, Output Function ....................................................... 60
327 Pulse Reference, Maximum Frequency ................................. 60
328 Pulse Feedback, Maximum Frequency.................................. 60
400 Reset Function ...................................................................... 61
401 Automatic Restart Time .......................................................... 61
402 Flying Start ............................................................................ 61
403 Sleep Mode Timer ................................................................ 62
404 Sleep Frequency .................................................................. 62
406 Boost Setpoint ....................................................................... 63
407 Switching Frequency ............................................................. 63
408 Interference Reduction Method .............................................. 63
409 Function in Case of No Load ................................................. 63
410 Function at Input Phase Loss ................................................. 64
412 Trip Delay Overcurrent ......................................................... 64
413 Minimum Feedback ............................................................... 65
414 Maximum Feedback .............................................................. 65
415 Units Relating to Closed Loop ................................................ 65
416 Feedback Conversion ........................................................... 69
418 Setpoint 1 .............................................................................. 70
419 Setpoint 2 .............................................................................. 70
420 PID Normal/Inverse Control .................................................. 70
421 PID Anti-windup .................................................................... 70
422 PID Start-up Frequency ........................................................ 70
423 PID Proportional Gain ........................................................... 71
424 PID Start-up Frequency ........................................................ 71
425 PID Differentiation Time ......................................................... 71
426 PID Differentiator Gain Limit ................................................... 71
427 PID Lowpass Filter Time ....................................................... 71
500 Protocol ................................................................................ 82
502 Baudrate ............................................................................... 82
503 Coasting Stop ........................................................................ 82
504 DC Brake .............................................................................. 83
505 Start ...................................................................................... 83
506 Reversing ............................................................................. 84
507 Selection of Setup .................................................................. 84
508 Selection of Preset Reference ................................................ 84
509 Resulting reference ............................................................... 85
509 through 532 Data Read-Out .................................................. 85
510 Resulting reference [unit] ....................................................... 85
511 Feedback [unit] ...................................................................... 85
512 Frequency [Hz] ..................................................................... 85
513 User-defined readout ............................................................ 85
514 Motor current [A] ................................................................... 85
515 Power [kW] ........................................................................... 85
516 Power [HP] ........................................................................... 85
517 Motor voltage [V] ................................................................... 85
518 DC link voltage [V] ................................................................ 85

519 Thermal load, motor [%] ........................................................ 85
520 Thermal load, VLT [%] .......................................................... 85
521 Digital input ............................................................................ 85
522 Terminal 53, analog input [V] ................................................. 85
523 Terminal 54, analog input [V] ................................................. 85
524 Terminal 60, analog input [mA] ............................................... 85
525 Pulse reference [Hz].............................................................. 85
526 External reference [%] .......................................................... 85
527 Status word ........................................................................... 85
528 Heat sink temperature [°C] .................................................... 85
529 Alarm word ........................................................................... 85
530 Control word ......................................................................... 85
531 Warning word ....................................................................... 85
532 Extended status word ............................................................ 85
533 Display Text 1 ....................................................................... 86
534 Display Text 2 ....................................................................... 86
536 Bus Feedback 2 .................................................................... 87
555 Bus Time Interval .................................................................. 87
556 Bus Time Interval Function ............................................. 87, 88
600 Operating Hours ................................................................... 90
601 Hours Run ............................................................................ 90
602 kWh Counter ......................................................................... 90
603 No. of Power-ups .................................................................. 90
604 No. of Overtemp Trips ........................................................... 90
605 No. of Overvoltage Trips ....................................................... 90
606 Digital Input ........................................................................... 91
607 Control Word ......................................................................... 91
608 Status Word........................................................................... 91
609 Reference ............................................................................. 91
610 Feedback .............................................................................. 91
611 Output Frequency ................................................................. 91
612 Output Voltage ....................................................................... 91
613 Output Current ...................................................................... 91
614 DC Link Voltage .................................................................... 91
615 Fault Log: Error Code ........................................................... 92
616 Fault Log: Time ..................................................................... 92
617 Fault Log: Value ................................................................... 92
618 Reset of kWh Counter ........................................................... 92
619 Reset of Hours Run Counter ................................................ 92
620 Operating Mode ................................................................... 92
621 - 631 Nameplate ................................................................... 94
621 Unit Type .............................................................................. 94
622 Power Component ................................................................ 94
623 VLT Ordering No. ................................................................. 94
624 Software Version No. ............................................................. 94
625 Control Panel Identification No. .............................................. 94
626 Database Identification No. .................................................... 94
627 Power Component Identification No. ...................................... 94
628 Application Option Type ......................................................... 94
629 Application Option Ordering No. ............................................. 94
630 Communication Option Type .................................................. 94
631 Communication Option Ordering No. ...................................... 94
700 Relay 3, Function .................................................................. 95
701 Relay 3, ON Delay................................................................ 95
702 Relay 3, OFF Delay.............................................................. 95
703 Relay 4, Function .................................................................. 95
704 Relay 4, ON Delay................................................................ 95

705 Relay 4, OFF Delay.............................................................. 95
706 Relay 5, Function .................................................................. 95
707 Relay 5, ON Delay................................................................ 95
708 Relay 5, OFF Delay.............................................................. 95
709 Relay 6, Function .................................................................. 95
710 Relay 6, ON Delay................................................................ 95
711 Relay 6, OFF Delay .............................................................. 95
Parameters, other references
Parameter 004 ............................................................................. 32
Parameter 005 ............................................................................. 32
Parameter 006 ............................................................................. 32
Parameter 105 ............................................................................. 14
Parameter 117 ............................................................................. 14
Parameter 200 through 228 ......................................................... 42
Parameter 300 through 328 ......................................................... 50
Parameter 400 through 427 ......................................................... 61 parameters, uploading ................................................................. 29
PID .................................................................................................. 66
PID NOR/INV. CTRL ...................................................................... 70
PID ANTI WINDUP .......................................................................... 70
PID controller ................................................................................... 66
PID DIFF. GAIN ............................................................................... 71
PID DIFF. TIME ............................................................................... 71
PID FILTER TIME ............................................................................ 71
PID INTEGR.TIME .......................................................................... 71
PID PROP. GAIN ............................................................................. 71
PID START VALUE .......................................................................... 70 plate, metal grounding ...................................................................... 14 potentiometer reference .................................................................... 23
POWER [HP].................................................................................... 33
POWER [KW] ................................................................................... 33
POWER HP ..................................................................................... 85 power, input ................................................................11, 12, 13, 14
POWER KW ..................................................................................... 85 power on LED.................................................................................. 25
POWER SECTION ........................................................................... 94
POWER UNIT DB ID ....................................................................... 94
POWER UPS ................................................................................... 90 pre-installation checks ....................................................................... 30
PREHEAT DC-CURR. ..................................................................... 39 present output frequency .................................................................. 81
PRESET REF. 1 .............................................................................. 47
PRESET REF. 2 .............................................................................. 47
PRESET REF. 3 .............................................................................. 47
PRESET REF. 4 .............................................................................. 47 preset reference ............................................................................... 51 process units .................................................................................... 61 process word ................................................................................... 78 proportional ...................................................................................... 66
PROTOCOL .................................................................................... 82 protocols .......................................................................................... 72
PULSE FDBK MAX. ......................................................................... 60 pulse feedback ................................................................................. 52
PULSE REF. MAX ........................................................................... 60
PULSE REFERENCE ...................................................................... 85 pulse reference ................................................................................ 52
PULSE REFERENCE [Hz] ............................................................... 33

Q quick menu ................................................................................ 24, 28

R radio frequency noise ......................................................................... 5
RAMP DOWN TIME ......................................................................... 45 ramp down time ................................................................................ 28 ramp times ........................................................................................ 42
RAMP UP TIME ............................................................................... 45 ramp up time .................................................................................... 28 rating, full load current ...................................................................... 37 readout, user defined ....................................................................... 33
REF. / FDBK. UNIT ......................................................................... 65
REF. FUNCTION ............................................................................. 46 reference ......................................................................................... 53
REFERENCE % .............................................................................. 85
REFERENCE [%] ............................................................................ 33
REFERENCE [UNIT] ....................................................................... 85 reference handling ........................................................................... 43
REFERENCE HIGH ........................................................................ 49
REFERENCE LOW .......................................................................... 49
REFERENCE SITE ......................................................................... 43 reference type .................................................................................. 46 references ........................................................................................ 42 references and limits .................................................................. 31, 42 regulation, inverse ........................................................................... 66
Relay 1 ............................................................................................ 59
Relay 1 function ................................................................................ 28
Relay 2 ............................................................................................ 59
Relay 2 function ................................................................................ 28 relay, auxiliary .................................................................................... 8 relay, electronic thermal .................................................................... 14 relay, form C .................................................................................... 19 relay, high-voltage ............................................................................ 18 relay option card .............................................................................. 95 relay outputs .................................................................................... 59
RELAY1 FUNCTION ....................................................................... 60
RELAY1 OFF DELAY ....................................................................... 60
RELAY1 ON DELAY ......................................................................... 60
RELAY2 FUNCTION ....................................................................... 60
RELAY3 FUNCTION ....................................................................... 95
RELAY3 OFF DELAY ....................................................................... 95
RELAY3 ON DELAY ......................................................................... 95
RELAY4 FUNCTION ....................................................................... 95
RELAY4 OFF DELAY ....................................................................... 95
RELAY4 ON DELAY ......................................................................... 95
RELAY5 FUNCTION ....................................................................... 95
RELAY5 OFF DELAY ....................................................................... 95
RELAY5 ON DELAY ......................................................................... 95
RELAY6 FUNCTION ....................................................................... 95
RELAY6 OFF DELAY ....................................................................... 95
RELAY6 ON DELAY ......................................................................... 95 relief, strain ....................................................................................... 14 remote, auto ..................................................................................... 25 remote, hand .................................................................................... 25

reset ................................................................................................. 51 reset and coasting stop, inverse ........................................................ 51 reset, auto ........................................................................................ 61
RESET FUNCTION ......................................................................... 61 reset function .................................................................................... 61
RESET key ............................................................................... 25, 35
RESET kWh COUNT ....................................................................... 92 reset, manual.................................................................................... 61
RESET RUN. HOUR ....................................................................... 92
RESONANCE DAMP. ...................................................................... 39 resonance dampening ...................................................................... 39 resulting reference ............................................................................ 43
REVERSING.................................................................................... 84 reversing ......................................................................................... 51 reversing and start ........................................................................... 51
RFI ............................................................................................. 5, 22
RS-485 ............................................................................................ 19
RUN AMA ........................................................................................ 38 run permissive........................................................................... 23, 52
RUNNING HOURS .......................................................................... 90

start character ................................................................................... 73
START DELAY ................................................................................. 39 start delay ........................................................................................ 39 start, flying ........................................................................................ 61 start voltage of parallel motors ........................................................... 39 start-up ............................................................................................. 30 start-up frequency ............................................................................ 66 status line ......................................................................................... 96 status messages ............................................................................... 96
STATUS WORD ............................................................................... 85 status word ....................................................................................... 80
STATUS WORD HEX ....................................................................... 85 strain relief ........................................................................................ 14 switch, Klixon thermal ....................................................................... 53 switches ................................................................................ 8, 9, 10 switches, DIP.................................................................................... 21
SWITCHING FREQ. ........................................................................ 63 switching frequency .......................................................................... 63

S

telegram ........................................................................................... 73
TERMINAL 53, ANALOG INPUT .................................................... 85
TERMINAL 54, ANALOG INPUT .................................................... 85
TERMINAL 60, ANALOG INPUT .................................................... 85 terminal blocks ....................................................................... 8, 9, 10 terminals, control ............................................................................... 19 terminals, ground .............................................................................. 15 test connector ................................................................................... 93
THERM.DRIVE LOAD [%] ............................................................... 33
THERM.MOTOR LOAD [%] ............................................................ 33 thermistor .................................................................................. 41, 53 time, differentiation ............................................................................. 71
TIME OUT ..................................................................................... 101 torque, tightening .............................................................................. 15 transmitter connection ....................................................................... 23 troubleshooting, general ................................................................... 30 two wire start/stop ............................................................................. 23 two zone inputs ................................................................................. 23

safety interlock .................................................................................. 51
SELECTING OF SETUP .................................................................. 84
SELECTING OF SPEED .................................................................. 84 serial communication .......................................................... 21, 31, 72 service functions ............................................................................... 31
Setpoint 1 ......................................................................................... 70
Setpoint 1 [units] ............................................................................... 33
Setpoint 2 ......................................................................................... 70
Setpoint 2 [units] ............................................................................... 33 setting up drive ................................................................................. 30 setup ................................................................................................ 51
SETUP 1 ......................................................................................... 31
SETUP 2 ......................................................................................... 31
SETUP 3 ......................................................................................... 31
SETUP 4 ......................................................................................... 31 setup, factory .................................................................................... 31 shield ................................................................................................. 5 shielded wires .................................................................................... 5
Siemens FLN ............................................................................ 72, 82 signal disturbances ............................................................................. 5 signal, feedback ................................................................................ 66 signal, output .................................................................................... 56
SLEEP FREQUENCY ...................................................................... 62 sleep mode ...................................................................................... 61
SLEEP MODE TIMER ..................................................................... 62
SMALL READOUT 1 ....................................................................... 34
SMALL READOUT 2 ....................................................................... 34
SMALL READOUT 3 ....................................................................... 35
SOFTWARE VERSION .................................................................... 94 sound level ...................................................................................... 63 speed up and speed down ............................................................... 51
START ............................................................................................. 83 start .................................................................................................. 51 start bit .............................................................................................. 73

T

U
U, V and W ...................................................................................... 11
UL, C-UL, and CE conformity ............................................................. 5
UNIT OF LOC REF ......................................................................... 35 units, selection of ............................................................................... 61 upload .............................................................................................. 32
UPLOAD ALL PARAMET. ................................................................ 32 uploading parameters ....................................................................... 29 user defined readout ................................................................. 32, 33

V
VLT CONTROL WORD, HEX ........................................................... 85
VLT TEMPERATURE ...................................................................... 85
VLT Type ............................................................................ 5, 67, 93
VT CHARACT ................................................................................. 36
VVC+ ............................................................................................... 37

W
WARNING ....................................................................................... 24
Warning Functions
Warning: High Current ................................................................. 48
Warning: High Feedback.............................................................. 49
Warning: High Frequency ............................................................ 48
Warning: High Reference ............................................................. 49
Warning: Low Current .................................................................. 48
Warning: Low Feedback .............................................................. 49
Warning: Low Frequency ............................................................. 48
Warning: Low Reference.............................................................. 49 warning functions .............................................................................. 48 warning lamp.................................................................................... 25 warning word ............................................................................ 85, 88 warnings .......................................................................................... 99
Warnings and Alarms ....................................................................... 98
ALARM: 14 ................................................................................ 100
ALARM: 15 ................................................................................ 100
ALARM: 16 ................................................................................ 100
ALARM: 22 ......................................................................... 38, 101
ALARM: 29 ................................................................................ 101
ALARM: 30 ................................................................................ 101
ALARM: 31 ................................................................................ 101
ALARM: 32 ................................................................................ 101
ALARM: 37 ................................................................................ 102
ALARM: 60 ................................................................................ 102
WARNING 1 ................................................................................ 99
WARNING 19 ............................................................................ 100
WARNING 20 ............................................................................ 100
WARNING 5 ................................................................................ 99

WARNING 6 ................................................................................ 99
WARNING/ALARM 10 ............................................................... 100
WARNING/ALARM 11 ............................................................... 100
WARNING/ALARM 12 ............................................................... 100
WARNING/ALARM 13 ............................................................... 100
WARNING/ALARM 17 ............................................................... 100
WARNING/ALARM 18 ............................................................... 100
WARNING/ALARM 2 ................................................................... 99
WARNING/ALARM 4 ................................................................... 99
WARNING/ALARM 7 ................................................................... 99
WARNING/ALARM 8 ................................................................... 99
WARNING/ALARM 9 ................................................................... 99
WARNING/ALARM: 34 .............................................................. 101
WARNING/ALARM: 63 .............................................................. 102
WARNING: 35 ........................................................................... 101
WARNING: 39 ........................................................................... 102
WARNING: 40 ........................................................................... 102
WARNING: 41 ........................................................................... 102
WARNING: 42 ........................................................................... 102
WARNING: 61 ........................................................................... 102
WARNING: 62 ........................................................................... 102
WARNING: 64 ........................................................................... 102
WARNING: 65 ........................................................................... 102
WARNING: 66 ........................................................................... 102
WARNING: 67 ........................................................................... 102
WARNING: 68 ........................................................................... 102
WARNING: 69 ........................................................................... 102
WARNING: 99 ........................................................................... 102 wires, shielded ................................................................................... 5

NOTES

118

VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

Similar Documents

Premium Essay

Accounting for Ngo in Bangladesh

...world affairs. Now, there are about twelve thousand NGOs in all over the world operating in most countries. These organizations are not directly affiliated with any national government, but often have a significant Impact on the social, economy and political activity of the country or region involved. So, we can say that NGOs have become major players in the field of international and national development. Bangladesh has largely failed to assist the poor or reduce poverty because of limited resources and planning, while NGOs have grown dramatically, but it ostensibly fails to fill this gap. There are more and bigger NGOs here than in any other country of equivalent size. Here, NGOs have mainly functioned to service the needs of the landless, usually assisted by foreign donor funding as a counterpoint to the state's efforts. Besides all these, in the field of NGO, Financial Reporting process and application of accounting is disgraceful. NGOs in Bangladesh have increasingly become subject to question and criticism from the government, political parties, intellectuals and the public in genus for misuse of funds, gender discrimination, and nepotism. Absence of proper guidelines in preparing financial statements and reports makes it more complex. The government of Bangladesh doesn’t have any unique rules for preparing the financial reports. In this report we will discuss about the financial reporting and Accounting system of NGOs and hopefully, the analysis and discussion of reporting...

Words: 8816 - Pages: 36

Free Essay

Accounting for Ngo in Bangladesh

...AccountAble Handbook Budget & Balance Report vFkZ'kkL= Corpus Voucher NGO Fixed Assets Register Grants Accounting Standards Narration Receipts and Revenue Stamps Benedetto Cotrugli Ledgers Regulation Cash Box Revolving Funds Accounting Multiple Cash Books Trial Balance Auditors Computerized Accounts Deficit Endowments Investments Journal Honorarium Form IIIA Bank Reconciliation Account Payee, Not Negotiable ction 10(23C)(iv) Blank Cheque Tax Exemption vkpk;Z dkSfVY; Key Persons ACCOUNTABILITY Contribution in Kind INCOME Transparency Public Disclosure Auditors’ Certificate Debit Stock Register Receipts & Payments Societies Registration Act, 1860 Public Trust TM AccountAid India Section 25 Non-profit Company Section 80G New Delhi Donation Ear-marked Funds Salary Register izfrxzkgdSÜpk;a Gratuity Conflict of Interest About this book (front inside cover) The AccountAble Handbook is a compilation of the individual issues of ‘AccountAble’, released by AccountAid India since 1994. These issues have been designed and circulated on a monthly basis primarily for the partners of our client Agencies. ‘AccountAble’ is circulated to about 1,200 persons, including Chartered Accountants. It is also available through e-mail, on a complimentary basis. The present compilation brings all issues of AccountAble related to accounting and regulation of non-profit organisations together at one place. Issues related...

Words: 101450 - Pages: 406

Premium Essay

Accounting for Ngos in Bangladesh

...Higher Education Crisis Dr Kumud Ch. Goswami Professor &Head, Deptt. of Commerce Dibrugarh University Email ID:goswamikumudchan@yahoo.co.in Mobile No:09435390988 University education in India is having a very rich heritage. Starting from Nalanda and Takshashila to the universities established during the British rule and the universities as of today we have a very strong institutional arrangement to carry on the process of higher education not only for our citizens but also for foreign nationals. For maintaining standard of higher education in our country there have been some national level bodies like the UGC, NAAC, AICTE and over and above we have a separate ministry for it called Ministry of Human Resource Development (MHRD). As per the UGC guidelines the Indian universities are to follow democratic principle to govern a university. As such the universities are created by passing a statute in the concerned state legislative assembly in case of a state university and in case of a central university the same is done in the parliament. This statute is called respective University Act. Before passing a university act the concerned people’s representatives are supposed to examine each...

Words: 1285 - Pages: 6

Premium Essay

Accounting for Ngo's in Bangladesh

...world affairs. Now, there are about twelve thousand NGOs in all over the world operating in most countries. These organizations are not directly affiliated with any national government, but often have a significant Impact on the social, economy and political activity of the country or region involved. So, we can say that NGOs have become major players in the field of international and national development. But Bangladesh has largely failed to assist the poor or reduce poverty because of limited resources and planning, while NGOs have grown dramatically, but it ostensibly fails to fill this gap. There are more and bigger NGOs here than in any other country of equivalent size. Here, NGOs have mainly functioned to service the needs of the landless, usually assisted by foreign donor funding as a counterpoint to the state's efforts. Besides all these, in the field of NGO, Financial Reporting process and application of accounting is disgraceful. NGOs in Bangladesh have increasingly become subject to question and criticism from the government, political parties, intellectuals and the public in genus for misuse of funds, gender discrimination, and nepotism. Absence of proper guidelines in preparing financial statements and reports makes it more complex. The government of Bangladesh doesn’t have any unique rules for preparing the financial reports. In this report we will discuss about the financial reporting and Accounting system of NGOs and hopefully, the analysis and discussion of reporting...

Words: 4751 - Pages: 20

Premium Essay

Analysis Ngo on Bangladesh

...Internship Report On NGO Accounting Practices in Bangladesh-A Case Study on BRAC Submitted to: Dr. Mahfuzul Hoque Professor Department of Accounting & Information Systems Faculty of Business Studies University of Dhaka Submitted by: Syeda Marzana Farha Roll No-11097 M.B.A. 11th batch Department of Accounting & Information Systems [pic] University of Dhaka CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1.1 Background The internship program is a pre-requisite for the MBA degree from the Faculty of Business Administration, University of Dhaka. In today’s world, education is the imperative tool for understand the real world and apply knowledge for betterment of the society as well as in Business Sector. From the education session the theoretical knowledge is obtained from various courses throughout the programs, which is only the half way of the subject matter. Practical knowledge has no alternative. The perfect coordination between theory and practice is of paramount importance in the context of modern business Graduates to get 12 weeks practical experience, that is Internship Program. Internship program brings student closer to the real life situation and thereby helps to launch a career with some prior experience. Internship is a step towards fulfilling this commitment by giving students an opportunity to get ready for the real world before they enter their practical...

Words: 14393 - Pages: 58

Premium Essay

Accounting System of Ngo

...Accounting System and Financial Reporting of NGOs: Case Study of a BRAC’s Project Munima Siddika1, Mohammad Sarwar Jahan Rekabder2 and A.K.M. Delwar Hossain3 tawheedfj@yahoo.com Abstract: In the absence of specific accounting and financial reporting standards and diverse interpretation of certain terms under the laws of the land, it has become a very difficult task to follow a standardized procedure in generation and presentation of accounting and financial information of NGOs. The practices followed by NGOs in Bangladesh are varied and diverse and there by preparation of financial statements are incomparable and difficult for uses to understand. The paper tries to demonstrate financial reporting and accounting system of a BRAC’s project and provide a guideline for constituting suitable financial reporting and accounting systems for NGOs. The article elaborates on basis of preparation of financial statements and reporting procedure and then followed by accounting systems of regional office and head office of that project. The final part of the article discuses issues relating to financial report and financial transparency of the project. Munima Siddika, Lecturer, Faculty of Business and Economics, Daffodil International University, 102 Sukrabad, Mirpur Road, Dhaka-1207, Bangladesh. Mohammad Sarwar Jahan Rekabder, Lecturer, Faculty of Business and Social Studies...

Words: 5240 - Pages: 21

Premium Essay

Accounting

...Accounting for Ngo's in Bangladesh 1. INTRODUCTION                   As globalization and international trade impact societies, non-government organizations have become increasingly influential in world affairs. Now, there are about twelve thousand NGOs in all over the world operating in most countries. These organizations are not directly affiliated with any national government, but often have a significant Impact on the social, economy and political activity of the country or region involved. So, we can say that NGOs have become major players in the field of international and national development. But Bangladesh has largely failed to assist the poor or reduce poverty because of limited resources and planning, while NGOs have grown dramatically, but it ostensibly fails to fill this gap. There are more and bigger NGOs here than in any other country of equivalent size. Here, NGOs have mainly functioned to service the needs of the landless, usually assisted by foreign donor funding as a counterpoint to the state's efforts. Besides all these, in the field of NGO, Financial Reporting process and application of accounting is disgraceful. NGOs in Bangladesh have increasingly become subject to question and criticism from the government, political parties, intellectuals and the public in genus for misuse of funds, gender discrimination, and nepotism. Absence of proper guidelines in preparing financial statements and reports makes it more complex. The government of Bangladesh doesn’t...

Words: 305 - Pages: 2

Free Essay

Financial Linkage

...Case study Bangladesh: Financial Linkages in Bangladesh Abdul Awal, Director, CDF Abstract: Microfinance in Bangladesh has almost reached the stage of a matured market. However, there are still substantial segments of potential clientele who are not serviced by any microfinance organization (MFI). Inadequate finance is one of the most important reasons MFIs have not reach these clients. Fund shortage is more prevalent among the smaller MFIs. Moreover, due to the scaling up of microenterprises of the existing clients, they are requiring larger loan amounts. On the other hand, though the formal financial organizations are burdened with significant amounts of excess liquidity, they are not in a position to directly provide services to microcredit clients - it is not viable. Even funding operations of smaller MFIs directly, are out of their reach. In such a situation, an effective linkage between the MFIs with financial constraint and banks with excess liquidity is a simple but highly effective solution. Introduction Poverty has always been on the development agenda in Bangladesh. In the history of this country, poverty has been rampant and presently Bangladesh is third in terms of number of poor following India and China. It is a densely populated country of only 150,000 square kilometers and a population of around 140 million. The country consists mainly of a flat delta plain. In addition to its very high population density, the country has a limited natural resource base and is...

Words: 4429 - Pages: 18

Premium Essay

Term Paper

...Introduce Value Based Management in NGOs of Bangladesh Munima Siddika1 Abstract: Presently the rapid growth and diversification of the gigantic NGO sector of Bangladesh has given rise to questions and concerns, about their trade-offs between sustainability and pro-poor orientation; the impact and quality of services; corporate governance; management and accountability. The paper is based on a proposal to introduce a modern management system viz. value based management (VBM) in the NGOs of Bangladesh. Value-based management can be defined as an integrated management control system that measures, encourages and supports the creation of net worth. The report of Transparency International Bangladesh ‘Problems of Governance in the NGO Sector: The Way Out’ (TIB) 2007 is used here as an information source of finding out the flaws of existing management techniques. Finally the paper recommended implementation techniques of VBM in order to regain the image of the NGOs as a pioneer of social welfare in Bangladesh. Keywords: NGO, Transparency, Governance, Management, Strategies, Value Addition, Value Based Management etc. 1. Introduction Bangladesh has largely failed to assist the poor or reduce poverty because of limited resources and faulty planning, while Non Government Organizations (NGOs) have grown dramatically and ostensibly to fill up this gap. There are more and bigger NGOs here than in any other country of equivalent size. Bangladesh’s NGO sector is remarkable for the speed with...

Words: 7065 - Pages: 29

Premium Essay

Bdjobs Training

...Page |1 ABOUT US Bdjobs Training has been the biggest professional training house in the country. The tracks of its training programs include Marketing/Sales, IT , Commercial, Finance, Quality & Process, Industrial Engineering, RMG, Banking, HR, Development/NGO, Management Development and so forth. Since its inception, Bdjobs Training has been mentoring the professionals by providing latest industry focused education. BT, in this expedition, engages hundreds of industry experts to ensure quality education to the young entrepreneurs and professionals of the country. BT offers both short (1 or 2 days) and long courses in the form of workshop and certificate training. Also BT offers customized in-house training programs exclusively designed for a group of employees. Customized courses can be provided either at our training facilities or on-site at clients’ location. Our training programs are lively, interactive, and include role-playing and demonstrations of real-life workplace issues and solutions. bdjobstraining.com Page |2 bdjobstraining.com Page |3 TRAINING TRACKS Marketing/ Sales Track • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1111 Selling Techniques for Excellence 13 Lessons to turn every Company into Fantastic Brands Advance Selling Techniques Art of Pharmaceutical Sales Brand Management–Walking the Talk Branding for Bangladeshi Business Constructive & Modern Leadership Approach in Selling through Team...

Words: 2551 - Pages: 11

Premium Essay

Mr. Kamruzzaman

...ASA NGO: An overview of ASA   The Beginnings & Expansion ASA has emerged as one of the largest and most efficient Microfinance Institution (MFI) in the world and has been working relentlessly to assist the poor since its inception in 1978. The major drive behind ASA is to gradually remove poverty from society. During its early years, ASA undertook various development programs like awareness building for social action, training local birth attendants, capacity building of journalists, etc. In the mid-80's it introduced new programs working in the sector of health and nutrition, education, sanitation, etc. It was at this stage that ASA introduced microcredit as a pilot project. From its hands on experience in the field, and by evaluating the impact of development assistance, ASA realized that financial solvency, to a great extent, is what the poor need to bringing positive changes in their lives. In 1992, this paradigm shift led ASA to focus solely on microfinance as its tool in fighting poverty. ASA wanted to evolve its operations to become self-reliant and move away from  depending on donor funding and grants - ASA's Microfinance Model gradually transformed itself to become the globally renowned "ASA Cost–effective and Sustainable Microfinance Model." Following this model, ASA became self-sustainable within a short span of time and the organization declared itself a "donor free MFI" in 2001. This model, that has been practiced and perfected in the field by...

Words: 3909 - Pages: 16

Premium Essay

Financial Support for Msme in Bangladesh

...Financial support for MSME in Bangladesh The SMEs worldwide are recognized as the most effective vehicle for sustainable economic growth. In Bangladesh , a sustainable level of development of small and medium enterprises (SMEs ) is highly needed to reach the targets set by The United Nations (UN) in the millennium Development Goals (MDGs) to alleviate poverty . This urgency is reflected in the Government’s pro-poor policies, especially in the poverty reduction strategy paper (PRSP) . Small and Medium Enterprises in Bangladesh have recently been considered as an important vehicles of poverty reduction strategy. For the first time, the comprehensive Industrial Policy 2005 highlighted SME development as a flagship policy area for balanced and sustainable industrial development in Bangladesh. Availability of finance is thought to be a major constraint to formation and growth of SMEs in Bangladesh. Banks are reluctant to expand their SME credit portfolio because they do not consider SME lending an attractive and profitable undertaking. This is so because SMEs are regarded as high risk borrowers because of their low capitalization, insufficient assets and their inability to comply with collateral requirements of the banks. Administrative costs are also higher because close monitoring and supervision the SME operation becomes necessary. Despite all these facts banks and financial institutions have been providing finance to the SME sector and the volume of finance is showing...

Words: 4586 - Pages: 19

Free Essay

Problem of Performance Appraisal in Bangladesh-a Case Study

...Rabeya feels secured about her future Ms. Rabeya Boshri a beneficiary of the "Jonaki Samiti" of Coast Trust, Cox's Bazar is a successful borrower of microcredit loan operations. She lives with her husband, Mr. Abdus Salam, a daughter and two sons. At present all her children go to school and she is able to bear both the educational and family expenses. Along with that she is now able to make some personal savings additional to general savings of "Jonaki samiti". But things were not the same even few years earlier. Her husband was a day labourer and it was very hard to bear family expenses with his single income. Their life was becoming tougher day by day and Rabeya wanted to do a bit by herself to help her husband from this growing desolation. One day she came to know that a samiti named "Jonaki" operated by Coast Trust, provides loan wih nominal conditions for a number of Income Generating Activities (IGAs). Sooner she spoke to the Chairperson of the "Jonaki Samiti" and became a memeber of that samity. After accomplishing all the regulations together with general savings she got her first loan installment of Taka 7000. She invested the money in vegetable cultivation. Subsequently she was able to sell some amount of vegetable per week after meeting her own family demand which helped her husband with additional income. In the intervening time she was able to save Taka 3000 along with the ragular savings of samiti and gradually she repaid the loan. After the repayment of...

Words: 23669 - Pages: 95

Premium Essay

Assignment on Structure of Finanacial Sector in Bangladesh

...1. Name & Number of banking & other financial institutions. (Category wise updated data) Bangladesh Bank Bangladesh Bank has been working as the central bank since the country’s independence. Its prime jobs include issuing of currency, maintaining foreign exchange reserve and providing transaction facilities of all public monetary matters. Bangladesh Bank regulates and supervises the activities of all banks. Bangladesh Bank is also responsible for planning the government’s monetary policy and implementing it thereby. The Bangladesh Bank has a governing body comprising of nine members with the Governor as its chief. Apart from the head office in Dhaka, it has nine more branches, of which two in Dhaka and one each in Chittagong, Rajshahi, khulna, Bogra, Sylhet, Rangpur and Barisal. Category of Bank in Bangladesh |Category |Number of banks | |Nationalized Commercial Banks |4 | |Local Private commercial banks |30 | |Foreign Private Banks |9 | |Specialized Banks of Bangladesh |5 | |Renowned Financial Institutions...

Words: 4630 - Pages: 19

Free Essay

Opportunity for Green Banking

...Green Banking Initiative: Opportunities for Bangladesh Dr. S M Ahsan Habib Professor and Director (Training & Research), BIBM The paper was presented at a seminar on Green Banking at BIBM on October 14, 2010 Green Banking Initiative: Opportunities for Bangladesh I. Introduction Banks that were once seen only as profit motive institutions have been adjusting to a more demanding market and to a more conscious society over last two decades. An increasing number of banks around the world are going green by providing innovative green products that cover financial services to support the activities that are not hazardous to environment and help conserve environment. A green bank is also called an ethical bank, a socially responsible bank, or a sustainable bank. The exact meaning of all these titles may not be same however they cover a lot of common activities and perceptions. At least, all these banks- in various ways and at different times- have engaged themselves in making a better future (Merzio 2007). The approach to green banking (GB) varies from bank to bank, however, broad objectives of green banks are to use their resources with responsibility avoiding waste and giving priority to environment and society. The public concern of the state of environment has been growing significantly in the last few years, mostly due to apparently unusual weather patterns, rising greenhouse gases, declining...

Words: 16618 - Pages: 67